Canon Mvx250i Mvx200i e Sm

No. D17-8216, 8233D17-8236

Digital Video Camera

CANON INC. 2004

Canon Inc.Digital Imaging Products Service Dept.

First Edition : Mar. 2004First Print : Mar. 2004

Video Product

c

MVX250i EMVX200i EMVX200 E

MVX250i EMVX200i EMVX200 E

iPAL

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

CONTENTS

1. Product Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1

1-1 Main Features ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1

1-1-1 Easy Direct Button ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1

1-1-2 DV Messenger 2 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2

1-2 Product Specifications Comparison Chart -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3

1-3 Function and Performance List --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4

2. Technical Explanation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10

2-1 Design ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10

2-1-1 Design Concept-1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10

2-1-2 Design Concept-2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10

2-1-3 Differences in Appearance of Overseas Models MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E ------------------------ 11

2-2 18× zoom lens -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12

2-2-1 Features of 18× lens -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12

2-2-2 New technologies and new functions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12

2-3 Easy Direct Button ([ ] Print/Share button) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 13

2-3-1 Direct Print function -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13

2-3-2 Direct Transfer --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14

2-3-2-1 Startup ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 15

2-3-2-2 ALL IMAGES ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16

2-3-2-3 NEW IMAGES --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17

2-3-2-4 TRANSFER ORDERS------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 18

2-3-2-5 SELECT & TRANSFER --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19

2-3-2-6 WALL PAPER ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20

3. Performance ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21

4. System Diagram (Common to all Models) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35

5. Overview of viewfinder / LCD panel displays --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36

5-1 Camera mode --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36

5-2 VCR mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 43

5-3 Card / Camera mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47

5-4 Card Playback mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50

5-4-1 Still image Playback -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50

5-4-2 Motion video (Motion JPEG) Playback ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 51

5-4-3 Direct printing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 52

5-5 Menu Display --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 53

5-6 Card-related screen displays ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 64

5-7 Direct print setting screen ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71

5-8 Print designations ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76

5-9 Warning displays ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 77

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 EGENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT

1

1. Product Overview

1-1 Main Features

1-1-1 Easy Direct Button

Easy Direct Button

(Print/Share Button)

Enables Easy Printing and PC File TransferThe button turns on when the camcorder is connected to a printer or PC

The light turns on to indicate the button to press next for easy operation

Printer

PC

Connection to Printer / PC

Lights up!

Visually check that the camcorder is con-nected correctly

Print setup information is displayed for 6 seconds

Pressing the Direct button starts printing

Pressing the Direct button starts file transfer to PC

The Transfer menu is displayed


2

1-1-2 DV Messenger 2

A peer-to-peer (P2P) type bidirectional communications software using DV (Digital Video Camcorder)

Allows bidirectional sending of audio/video content and messages (text/images) via the Internet.

Basic specifications are compatible with Windows Messenger.

Allows control (camera zoom and focus, VCR playback and stop, access to the memory card) of the digital video camcorder

from a remote PC.

Remote home monitoring camera using the web camera function (enables monitoring of your home from a remote location)

IEEE1394 IEEE1394Internet


3

1-2 Product Specifications Comparison Chart

*1 : Not applicable to MVX200 E

Specifications MVX250i E MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Zoom mag. Tape optical 18× / digital 360× optical 14× / digital 280×

Card optical 18× / digital 72× optical 14× / digital 56×

CCD 1/4.5-inch interlaced CCD (Total pixels : Approx. 1.33 megapixels)

(Effective pixels Tape motion video : Approx. 860,000 pixels

Card still image: Approx. 1,230,000 pixels)

Image stabilizer Electronic image stabilizer (during tape mode only)

Monitor 2.5-inch 123,000 pixel LCD monitor

EVF 0.33-inch 113,000 pixel color viewfinder

Memory card function (SD memory card, MultiMediaCard)

Card Still images Progressive Photo

recording (1024×768, 640×480)

Card motion videoAVI (Video data: Motion JPEG / Audio data: WAVE (monaural))

recording

USB file transfer

Direct print (Support for Direct Print, Bubble Jet Direct, and PictBridge)

File transfer IEEE1394 / USB

Streaming IEEE1394

USB compatibility (USB 2.0 Full Speed class with PTP support)

Accessory shoe (Advanced accessory shoe not supported)

Auxiliary illumination White LED (Night+ : always on)

function (Super Night : Lights in accordance ×

with brightness)

Night mode (Night, Night+, Super Night) (Night)

High-resolution 16:9 (Letterbox display)

END search

S-Video terminal

DV, analog line inputs

Microphone terminal × *1

Wide attachment lens×

supplied

Remote controller

supplied battery NB-2LH (MVX250i E only is supplied with BP-2L14)


4

1-3 Function and Performance List

Item MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Camera

Image sensing Image size 1/4.5-inch CCD

device System (filter) Interlacing (color correction filter)

Total pixels Approx. 1.33 megapixels

Effective pixels Tape Approx. 860,000 pixels

Card Approx. 1,230,000 pixels

Lens Optical zoom magnification, Tape MVX250i E : 18× 3.5 to 63 mm (Approx. 45.4 to 817.2 mm)

focal length MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 14× 3.5 to 49 mm (Approx. 45.4 to 635.6 mm)

(35mm equivalent) Card MVX250i E : 18× 3.5 to 63 mm (Approx. 37.9 to 682.2 mm)

MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 14× 3.5 to 49 mm (Approx. 37.9 to 530.6 mm)

Digital zoom Magnification Tape MVX250i E : 72× / 360× 252 mm / 1,260 mm

magnification (Approx. 3,269 mm / 16,344 mm equivalent)

focal length MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 56× / 280× 196 mm / 980 mm

(35mm equivalent) (Approx. 2,542 mm / 12,712 mm equivalent)

Card MVX250i E : 72× Approx. 252 mm (Approx. 2,728.8 mm equivalent)

MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 56× Approx. 196 mm

(Approx. 2,122.4 mm equivalent)

System Tape CCD readout

Card CCD readout

F number Tape MVX250i E : F1.8 to 3.4

MVX200i E, MVX200 E : F1.8 to 3.1

Card MVX250i E : F1.8 to 3.4

MVX200i E, MVX200 E : F1.8 to 3.1

Aperture leaves (Number of leaves) 2 leaves

Zoom speed Variable

Filter diameter 34mm P0.5

Noise reduction Camera Tape Either CCD-NR or Y/C-NR

Card None

Chroma-only, median filter

Recorder C-NR system

Minimum Night mode 1.5 lx

illumination Low Light mode 3.0 lx

Auto mode(when auto slow shutter is selected) 6.0 lx

Image Image stabilization system Tape Electronic system

stabilization Card None

Sensing method Angular velocity sensing

MotionvideoStillimage


5


Shooting functions

AE mode Program AE Tape (Full Auto)

(Auto, Sports, Portrait, Spotlight, Surf & Snow, Low Light, Night,

Night+*, Super Night * (* : MVX250i E only))

Card (Full Auto)

(Auto, Sports, Portrait, Spotlight, Surf & Snow, Low Light, Night,

Night+*, Super Night * (* : MVX250i E only))

Photometric Center-bottom-weighted average Tape Full Auto, Auto, Sports, Portrait, Low Light, Night, Night+*, Super Night*

system (* : MVX250i E only)

Evaluation photometry (128- Tape 128 segments (Spotlight mode, Surf & Snow (Sand & Snow mode))

segments) + All area photometry Card

Evaluative photometry (128- Card Full Auto, Auto, Sports, Portrait, Low Light, Night, Night+*, Super Night*

segments) (* : MVX250i E only)

Exposure AE lock (Except Green mode)

adjustment AE shift ×

Exposure correction ±11 steps

(Disabled in Green mode, Spotlight mode, and Surf & Snow mode)

Manual gain setting ×

Back light correction ×

Shutter speed Auto mode Tape 1/25 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter ON), 1/50 to 1/500 sec

(with auto slow shutter OFF)

Card 1/12.5 to 1/250 sec (with auto slow shutter ON), 1/25 to 1/250 sec

(with auto slow shutter OFF)

Auto Tape 6 levels (1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec)

(Shutter speed setting) Card 3 levels (1/50, 1/120, 1/250 sec)

Low Light 1/12.5 sec (Low Light mode)

Night, Night+*, Super Night* Tape 1/6 to 1/500 sec

(* MVX250i E only) Card 1/2 to 1/250 sec

Iris control Auto iris

Auxiliary light Flash ×

Video light ×

White LED (MVX250i E only)

Image quality Color gain adjustment ×

adjustment Hue adjustment ×

(Custom preset) Sharpness adjustment ×

Setup adjustment ×

White balance Auto

Preset Outdoor, Indoor

Systems TTL, 128 segments

Focus Mode AF/MF, forced infinity

Manual focus SET button operation

16:9 Recording system Tape High image

quality 16:9

Card ×

Area marker display ×

&


6


Shooting functions

Digital fade Tape Motion video Auto Fade, Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide

(Activated by pressing Start/Stop button)

Still image ×

Card Motion video ×

Still image ×

Digital effect Tape Motion video/still image Art, Black & White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror

Card Motion video/still image Black & White

Card mix Tape Motion video/still image Card Lumi key, Card Chroma key, Camera Chroma key, Animation

Card Motion video/still image ×

Multi-screen Tape Motion video/still image Supported (Disabled in Night mode, Night+ mode, and Super Night mode)

Card Motion video/still image ×

Capture speed Shutter speed ≥ 1/25sec Manual, Fast (4 fields), Normal (6 fields), Slow (8 fields)

Shutter speed < 1/25sec Manual, Fast (4 fields), Normal (8 fields), Slow (12 fields)

Screen segments 4 (2 × 2) / 9 (3 × 3) / 16 (4 × 4)

Motion video Tape miniDV (SP, LP)

shooting Card Image size 320 × 240, 160 × 120 dots

(MVX250i E) Shooting SDC-8M 320 × 240 dots (continuous, approx. 20 sec)

time 160 × 120 dots (continuous, approx. 50 sec)

MMC-8M 320 × 240 dots (continuous, approx. 10 sec)

160 × 120 dots (continuous, approx. 30 sec) per shot

Still image Tape ×

recording Card Recording system Progressive photo

Recording image Frame image

Single image

Continuous shooting (Fast, Normal)

AEB

Image size 1280 × 960, 640 × 480

Image quality Super Fine, Fine, Normal

Photo Form Dedicated still image button (in card mode only)

button Pressed (Only during recording standby)

halfway down

Card review (image setting menu obtained by pressing photo button + SET button)

Flash photography (with VFL-1 (sold separately) attached (MVX250i E only)

Negative-positive reversal ×

Built-in Video light × (MVX250i E only, equipped with white LED (lights in

Super Night mode, Night+ mode))

(VL-3 support in MVX250i E only (Advanced accessory shoe))

Zebra pattern ×

Color bar display ×

Self-timer 10 sec / Remote controller : 2 seconds

Interval timer ×

Clearscan ×

Recorded image size and file format VGA : 640(H) × 480 (V), SXGA : 1280(H) × 960(V) / JPEG

Memory card SD memory card, MultiMediaCard

REC Search

REC Review

Standby switch ×

Power save (After five minutes in Recording pause) Power shutoff


7


Shooting functions

Displayed text recording ×

Audio 16-bit 2-ch (48KHz)

12-bit 4-ch (32 kHz) Simultaneous 4-channel recording not possible

Wind screen With AUTO/OFF switch (built-in microphone only)

EVF Size 0.33-inch (TFT color RGB delta arrangement)

Pixels 113,000 pixels

Brightness adjustment ×

Color adjustment ×

Movable ×

LCD monitor Screen size 2.5-inch

Pixels 123,000 pixels

Brightness adjustment

Movable mirror shooting supported

VCR

Playback Frame playback Forward / Reverse

system Slow playback Forward / Reverse

2X SP playback Forward / Reverse

1X SP playback Forward / Reverse

Cue / review 11.5× speed

Search Photo search ×

Date search

Index search ×

End search

Special playback Playback zoom (5× zoom) (In tape playback and card still image playback)

effects D. effects Tape Art, Black & White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror

Card Black & White

D. fade Tape Auto fade, Wipe, Corner wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zig Zag, Beam, Tide

Card ×

Multi screen 4, 9 or 16 screens (Tape only)

Data code display Time and Date display

Card Slide show

Index playback

(6-screen playback)

Card fast forward / rewind Card jump

Audio dubbing (Model MVX200 E : built-in microphone only)

AV insert ×

Zero set memory

Editing functions Simple editing ×

Special effects ×


8


System

Interface Microphone input (MVX250i E only)

(terminal) Headphone output (Also serves as AV terminal)

DV terminal Input / output. (However, output only on MVX200 E models.)

S-Video terminal Input / output. (However, output only on MVX200 E models.)

AV terminal Input/output, φ3.5mm jack (also serves as headphone terminal.

However, output only on MVX200 E models.)

Editing terminals (LANC terminal) ×

USB port

(mini-B Receptacle USB 2.0 Full Speed)

Memory card file transfer

Analog ⇒ DV signal conversion (excluding model MVX200 E)

Direct printer Camera direct (CP-10, CP-100)

Photo direct (PIXUS 50i, PIXUS BJ 895PD, PIXUS BJ 535PD)

PictBridge (CP-200/PC-300, Pixus 990i and other PictBridge compatible bubble-

jet printers)

My Camera Startup screen creation

settings Startup screen selection

Startup sound

Shutter sound

Self-timer sound

World clock (Date display (Japanese, North American or European format can be

selected))

Text titles ×

Speaker

Confirmation beep

Tally lamp ×

Remote control cord Supports 1 and 2,

Accessory shoe (Advanced accessory shoe compatible MVX250i E model only)

Video ID (ID2 : NTSC only)

Recording media Tape miniDV, SP,LP

Card SD memory card, MultiMediaCard

Illuminated keys ×

Custom keys ×

Night mode key

DV control ×

Internal battery charging (CA-570 connection)

Backup power Lithium coin battery (CR1616)

Battery pack power NB-2L, NB-2LH, BP-2L12, and BP-2L14 lithium ion batteries


9

External View

Fig. 1


10

2. Technical Explanation

2-1 Design

2-1-1 Design Concept-1

<Parallel Layout Design>

New concept design with short height Size about

40%

smaller than the MVX3i E

2-1-2 Design Concept-2

<Distinctive Body Design>

The design has a distinctive character line cross-

ing diagonally over the lens section.

In this design, a brilliant metallic coating cre-

ates remarkable highlights and shadows under

light for creating a stunning impression.

<Brilliant Metallic Color>

Metallic colors are used for the cassette cover

side. Metal and chrome parts are also used for

the lens ring and Megapixel badge to provide a

sense of refinement.

<Round Grip>

In addition to the round-shaped grip for enabling

a stronger grip, the finger grips use elastomer

for allowing a firm hold.

<Easy Direct Buttons>

This is the first DVC to use the Easy Direct

Buttons. This makes printing as easy as press-

ing a button.


11

2-1-3 Differences in Appearance of Overseas Models MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Grip top/Front lens Side/Side connector cover are molded Gray color (finish is not used for cost reasons)

Bluish, high-brilliance metallic finish

Model MVX250i E

In comparison to the lens barrel section, alow-contrast two-tone design is used with alow-brightness, brilliant silver metallic finish.

Model MVX200i E, MVX200 E


12

2-2 18× zoom lens

2-2-1 Features of 18× lens

· Highest zoom ratio in a mechanical unit

· Extremely high cost-performance ratio

2-2-2 New technologies and new functions

A two-sided aspherical lens and high-refraction glass are arranged efficiently to minimize the size despite an increased number of

lenses.

The movement amount of the compensator near the tele end was also increased to reduce the load on the variator and achieve an

efficient zoom ratio over the entire short length.

Lens incorporated in MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Lens incorporated in MVX3i E


13

2-3 Easy Direct Button ([ ] Print/Share button)

2-3-1 Direct Print function

The Easy Direct Button enables you to immediately start printing by simply connecting the video camera to a Camera Direct compatible

printer and pressing the button while it is lit.

(1)Connect the printer, and then turn on the printer.

(2)Set the video camera to Card Playback mode.

(3)Once the connection is made with the printer ( SETUPSETUP or other indicator is displayed), the button lights up blue. Press

the button to start printing.

Off

(1)

(2)

(3)

Off

On

Direct printer connection

(Press the MENU button)Press the SETUP button

Press the SETUP button

Button lights up : Indicates button operation is possible.

Button operation guide

Button turns off : Indicates button operation is not possible.

Button flashing : Indicates printing is in progress.

Press the button

Flashing

* When still images are displayed for the first time after connection, the setting status appears over the screen (2) for six seconds (figure at right).

The procedure for previous models is shown below.

(1)Connect the printer, and then turn on the printer.

(2)Set the video camera to Card Playback mode.

(3)Once the connection is made with the printer ( SETUPSETUP is displayed), press the SETUP button.

(4)This changes to the Print Setting screen. Check that you are ready to start printing, and then press the SETUP button to start

printing.

With the Easy Direct Button, step (3) is eliminated for even easier searching and printing of multiple images.


14

2-3-2 Direct Transfer

The Direct Transfer function uses the Easy Direct Button [ ] to easily transfer

images to a computer.

When the video camera is connected to a computer and set to Card Playback mode, the

Transfer menu is displayed on the video camera LCD screen. The user simply selects the

desired option from the menu and presses the Direct button to easily transfer the image to

the computer.

ZoomBrowser 4.6×, which supports Direct Transfer, must already be installed on the computer.

The supported OS are Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows ME, and Windows 98 (Macintosh is not supported).

The transferred image is saved in a folder designated by ZoomBrowser.

The available files types for transfer are JPEG and Motion-JPEG (MPEG-4 is not supported).

(Note that only JPEG files can be transferred in the PC Wallpaper option.)

The Transfer menu has the following five options.

· ALL IMAGES... : This transfers all images recorded in the memory card

to the computer.

· NEW IMAGES... : This transfers images in the memory card that have

not been already transferred.

· TRANSFER ORDERS... : This uses the DPOF function to transfer only images

with a check mark. Note that the images need to be

designated for sending at the Send Designation Set-

ting screen beforehand.

· SELECT &TRANSFER... : The user checks the images one at a time before transferring.

· WALLPAPER... : This enables the user to check the image one at a time before transferring and setting as the

computer’s wallpaper in realtime.


15

2-3-2-1 Startup

Set the video camera to Card Playback mode, and then connect to a computer with a USB cable.

Direct Transfer does not start unless a memory card is loaded.

After Direct Transfer is started, the image that is displayed first is determined by the following conditions.

1. “No Image Warning” is displayed if there are no recorded images in the memory card.

2. The Menu screen is displayed when the option that was last executed is not recorded, such as when using for the first time.

3. If ALL IMAGES , NEW IMAGES or TRANSFER ORDERS is recorded as the last executed option, the Direct

Transfer menu screen is displayed.

4. If SELECT &TRANSFER or WALL PAPER is recorded as the last executed option, the SELECT &TRANSFER

screen is displayed.

Function Operation Description


Startup

The computer and video camera are connected by a USB cable.

This proceeds to the Menu screen.

ALL IMAGES : See 2.3.2.2 .

NEW IMAGES : See 2.3.2.3 .

TRANSFER ORDERS : See 2.3.2.4 .

SELECT &TRANSFER : See 2.3.2.5 .

WALL PAPER : See 2.3.2.6

SELECT &TRANSFER : See 2.3.2.5

WALL PAPER : See 2.3.2.6

Menu screen

Select Image screen


Startup conditions 2 and 3

No Image Warning screen

Button lights up

Button turns offStartup condition 4

Button lights up


16

2-3-2-2 ALL IMAGES

This transfers all images in the camera and saves them to the computer.


CancelPress down the [SET] or [MENU] button.

• This cancels the transfer and returns to the Menu screen.

Button turns off


Transfer all images

Move the [SET] button up and down to select images, and then press down the [SET] button.

• This proceeds to the Confirm Transfer screen.

Move the [SET] button up and down to select images, and then press down the Easy Direct button.

• The transfer confirmation is omitted, and the Transfer in Progress screen is displayed.

• The function executed last is recorded as the selected function.

Menu screen

Confirm Transfer screen


Cancel Move the [SET] button up and down to select images, and then press down the [SET] button.

• This cancels the selected function and returns to the Menu screen.

OK• This performs the transfer and proceeds to

the Transfer in Progress screen.

Transfer in Progress screen (with progress bar)

• The transfer progress is based on the “Number of images for which transfer was completed/Total number of images to be transferred”.

• If the number of images exceeds 9999, the value is fixed at 9999.

Return to Menu screen

Button lights up

Button turns offCancel OK

Finish Transfer or Cancel

[SET][ ]


17

2-3-2-3 NEW IMAGES

All untransferred images are transferred and saved to the computer.


Transfer untransferred images






Menu screen

Confirm Transfer screen






[SET]






• If the number of images exceeds 9999, the value is fixed at 9999.


OKCancel


Button lights up

Button lights up

Button lights up

[ ]


18

2-3-2-4 TRANSFER ORDERS

All images designated for sending are transferred and saved to the computer.





Transfer send-designated images






Menu screen

Confirm Transfer screenFunction Operation Description





[SET]


• After analysis of the send-designated images is complete, this proceeds to the Transfer in Progress screen (with progress bar).



• If the number of images exceeds 9999, the value is fixed at 9999.Return to Menu screen

Button lights up

Button turns off

Button turns off

Button turns off

Analyzing Send-designated Images screen

OK

Analysis Complete

Cancel


[ ]


19

2-3-2-5 SELECT & TRANSFER

The user views the images one at a time and transfers and saves them to the computer.


Select images for transfer






Menu screen

Select Image screenFunction Operation Description

Transfer images

Press [SET] orbutton.

• This transfers the selected images.• After inputting the transfer, the user can

immediately continue to select other images and input transfer even while the transfer of an image is in progress.

• If a file that cannot be played is selected for transfer, a warning screen is displayed.

Menu display Press [ MENU] button.

• If an image is being transferred, this proceeds to the Transfer in Progress screen.

• This returns to the Menu screen if an image is being transferred.

Change image

Press [CARD +/–] buttons.

• This moves the image selection forward/backward.

• Changes can be made even if image transfer is in progress.


• When the transfer is completed, this returns to the Menu screen.

Warning screen


[MENU] button while image transfer is in progress

or [SET]

[MENU] button while image transfer is not in progress

Button lights up

Button lights up

Button flashing

Transfer complete


• The warning screen is displayed for about one second, and then it returns to the Select Image screen.

Button lights up

Image Transfer in Progress screen (no progress bar)

Button flashing(Image transfer in progress)

[ ]


20

2-3-2-6 WALL PAPER

The user views the images one at a time and transfers and saves them to the computer.

The transferred image is displayed on the computer desktop


Set image as computer wallpaper






Menu screen

Select Image screenFunction Operation Description

Transfer images

Press [SET] or button

• This transfers the selected images.• After inputting the transfer, the user can

immediately continue to select other images and input transfer even while the transfer of an image is in progress.

• A warning screen is displayed if the transfer is made with a motion video file selected.

Menu display Press [MENU] button

• If an image is being transferred, this proceeds to the Transfer in Progress screen.

• This returns to the Menu screen if an image is being transferred.

Change image

Press [CARD +/–] buttons

• This moves the image selection forward/backward.

• Changes can be made even if image transfer is in progress.

or [SET] button


• When the transfer is completed, this returns to the Menu screen.

Image Transfer in Progress screen (no progress bar)


Warning screen


• The warning screen is displayed for about one second, and then it returns to the Select Image screen.

Button lights up Button flashing(Image transfer in progress)

Button flashing

Button lights up

[MENU] button while image transfer is in progress

[MENU] button while image transfer is not in progress

Button lights up

[ ]


21

3. Performance

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

1 Type VCR- integrated camera

2 Recording system Rotating two-head helical scan azimuth recording

Consumer electronics digital DVC (SD specs)

Complies with NTSC system (625 lines, 50 fields)

2-1 Video signal recording system Digital component recording.

R-Y, B-Y = 6.75MHz

2-1-1 Quantized bits 8bits

2-2 Audio signal recording system PCM digital recording.

16-bit : 48KHz 2 ch (Stereo 1)

12-bit : 32KHz 4 ch (Stereo 1 and 2)

2-3 Tracking 2-frequency pilot system

2-4 Tape speed Approx. 18.83mm / sec (in SP mode)

Approx. 12.57mm / sec (in LP mode)

2-5 Head drum

2-5-1 Drum diameter 21.7mm

2-5-2 Rpms 9000 / 1.001 rotations / minute

2-5-3 Heads Video heads : 2

3 Recording / playback time 80 minutes maximum (in SP mode), using 80-minute tape

120 minutes maximum (in LP mode), using 80-minute tape

3-1 Continuous recording time / actual recording time / playback time using battery

4 Compatible cassette tape Mini DVC specs

4-1 Tape type Vapor - deposited metal tape

4-2 Tape width 6.35mm

4-3 Tape thickness 7µm or 5.3µm

5 Camera

5-1 Image sensing device 1 / 4.5 - inch interlaced CCD

5-1-1 Total number of pixels Approx. 1.33 megapixels (1363H × 975V)

5-1-2 Effective pixels

In tape recording Approx. 860,000 pixels (1072H × 804V)

In card recording Approx. 1,230,000 pixels (1280H × 960V)

High- resolution 16: 9 shooting Approx. 920,000 pixels (1280(H) × 720(V) when image stabilizer is OFF)

(in tape mode) Approx. 790,000 pixels (1184(H) × 666(V) when image stabilizer is ON)

5-1-3 Filter Color correction filter

5-1-4 Color separation system Differential readout

5-1-5 Signal configuration NTSC standard color TV signal

5-1-6 Scanning system 625 lines, 50 fields / 25 frames

5-1-7 Minimum subject illumination

In Auto mode Approx. 6.0 lx (1/25 sec. shutter speed)

In Low light mode Approx. 3.0 lx (1/12.5 sec. shutter speed)

In Night mode Approx. 1.5 lx (1/6 sec. shutter speed)

5-1-8 Subject illumination range Approx. 1.5 lx to approx. 100,000 lx


When viewfinder is used When LCD monitor is used

Continuous Actual Continuous Actual Continuousrecording recording recording recording playback

NB-2L Approx. 95 min Approx.50 min Approx. 75 min Approx. 40 min Approx. 85 min

NB-2LH Approx.115 min Approx. 65 min Approx. 90 min Approx. 50 min Approx.105 min

BP-2L12 Approx.200 min Approx.110 min Approx.150 min Approx. 85 min Approx.175 min

BP-2L14 Approx.240 min Approx.135 min Approx.190 min Approx.105 min Approx.220 min


22

5-2 Photo lens

5-2-1 Nominal focal length

Tape recording MVX250i E 3.5 to 63 mm 18× zoom (35 mm film equivalent : 45.4 to 817.2 mm)

MVX200i E, MVX200 E

3.5 to 49 mm 14× zoom (35 mm film equivalent : 45.4 to 635.6 mm)

Card recording MVX250i E 3.5 to 63 mm 18× zoom (35 mm film equivalent : 37.9 to 682.2 mm)

MVX200i E, MVX200 E

3.5 to 49 mm 14× zoom (35 mm film equivalent : 37.9 to 530.6 mm)

5-2-2 Nominal diametric ratio

MVX250i E 1 : 1.8 (F3.4 on tele end)

1 : 1.8 (F3.3 on tele end)

MVX200i E, MVX200 E

1 : 1.8 (F3.1 on tele end)

5-2-3 Lens configuration 10 elements in 8 groups, using one two- sided aspherical lens

5-2-4 Focus adjustment Inner focus type, manually adjustable (adjusted by rotating multi- dial)

5-2-5 Minimum object distance 10 mm (AF linked ; wide end), 1 m for full zoom area (from lens tip)

5-2-6 Power zoom Multi- level adjustable power zoom. Slide lever operation. Zoom speed can be adjusted by mov-

ing slide lever.

Manual zoom not possible (No zoom ring)

5-2-6-1 Zoom speed

Optical zoom Approx. 4.3 seconds to approx. 50 seconds

Using electronic zoom Approx. 5.8 seconds to approx. 55 seconds

5-2-7 Focal length display None. Simple zoom display inside finder.

5-2-8 Macro mechanism Wide end macro

5-2-9 Macro shooting distance 10 mm (from lens front)

5-2-10 Filter diameter 34 mm P0.5

5-2-11 Accessory lens, filter Can use WD-H34, TL-H34, FS-34U

5-2-12 Lens hood None

5-2-13 Lens cap Included ; Screw-on type

5-3 Digital zoom

5-3-1 During tape recording

MVX250i E To 72× (approx. 252 mm (35 mm equivalent : 3,269 mm)), to 360× (approx. 1,260 mm (35 mm

equivalent : 16,344 mm))

MVX200i E, MVX200 E

To 56× (approx. 196 mm (35 mm equivalent: 2,542 mm)), to 280× (approx. 980 mm (35 mm

equivalent : 12,712 mm))

5-3-2 During card recording

MVX250i E To 72× (approx. 252 mm (35 mm equivalent : 2,728.8 mm))

MVX200i E, MVX200 E

To 56× (approx. 196 mm (35 mm equivalent : 2,122.4 mm))

5-4 Image stabilization function Supported

5-4-1 System Electronic image stabilizer

5-4-2 Image stabilization detection Angular velocity sensing (using piezoelectric vibration sensor)

5-5 Shooting modes Motion video shooting mode, photo shooting mode (card recording)

5-5-1 Tape mode Normal motion video is recorded (interlaced scanning) on miniDV cassettes.

In addition, when an SD memory card (or MultiMediaCard) is installed and [ ] Fine], or [

] Normal] is selected for [Photo record] on the menu, still images (640 × 480) are recorded

on the memory card while motion video is recorded on the tape. (Simultaneous recording)

5-5-2 Card mode Still images (progressive photo images: JPEG) or motion video (Motion- JPEG 15 (12.5) frames/

sec audio (monaural)) can be recorded on SD memory card (or MultiMediaCard).

Refer to the memory card system on page 27.

5-6 Exposure control

5-6-1 Program AE Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, Portrait mode, Spotlight mode, Surf (Sand) & Snow

mode, Low Light mode, Night mode, Night+ mode, Super Night mode (Night+, Super Night

mode are for MVX250i E only)


23

5-6-2 AE photometric system

Tape recording Center- bottom- weighted average :

Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, Portrait mode, Low Light mode,

Night mode, Night+ mode, Super Night mode (Night+ mode and Super

Night mode are for MVX250i E only)

All area average photometry + 128-segment (16H × 8V) evaluative photometry :

Spotlight mode, Surf & Snow mode

Card recording Evaluative photometry (128- segment):

Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, Portrait mode, Low Light mode,

Night mode, Night+ mode and Super Night mode (Night+ mode and Su-

per Night mode are available in MVX250i E only.)

All area average photometry + 128- segment evaluative photometry :

Spotlight mode, Surf (Sand) &Snow mode

5-6-3 Exposure correction function

AE lock AE is locked by pressing the EXP lock button. After the AE is locked, the exposure level can be

corrected using the SET button (except in Full Auto mode).

Exposure correction amount ± 11 levels(–11 to 0 to +11).

Indicated as number in the viewfinder (EXP lock ± 0).

5-6-4 Electronic shutter

5-6-4-1 In Auto mode <Tape mode>

Auto : 1/25 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter ON)

1/50 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter OFF)

Select : 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000 or 1/2000 sec.

<Card mode>

Auto : 1/12.5 to 1/250 sec (with auto slow shutter ON)

1/25 to 1/250 sec (with auto slow shutter OFF)

Select : 1/50, 1/120 or 1/250 sec.

5-6-4-2 In Low Light mode 1/12.5 (fixed speed)

5-6-4-3 In Night mode

Tape recording 1/6 sec to 1/500 sec (same for Night+, Super Night modes of MVX250i E)

Card recording 1/2 sec to 1/250 sec (same for Night+, Super Night modes of MVX250i E)

5-7 AF (Auto Focus)

5-7-1 System TTL–video signal sensing

5-7-2 AF range finding area

During Tape mode Screen center

During Card mode One of 3 locations on screen selected (screen center only in full auto mode)

5-7-3 AF Range finding frame display

During Tape mode None

During Card mode Supported (During focus priority : User can select desired frame (green) from one of the 3- point

range finding frame display. Screen center only during Full Auto mode.)

5-7-4 AF operating range 10 mm to infinite (at wide end) ; 1 mm to infinite in full zoom area from lens front

5-7-5 AF operation illumination range Approx. 50 lx - 100,000 lx

5-7-6 AF mode switching Continuous AF / manual focus / infinite focus. AF ON/OFF switching is possible in all but Full

Auto mode (operation by pressing focus button).

Manual focus During manual focus (AF OFF), the MF indicator appears in the viewfinder.

Infinity focus The shooting distance can be forced to infinity by holding down the focus button in the auto

focus mode.

5-8 Viewfinder 0.33-inch Color LCD (approx. 113,000 pixels). ON when LCD monitor closed (panel facing in-

wards) and during mirror shooting

5-8-1 Rotation Possible (70 deg. upward to support low-angle shooting)

5-8-2 Detaching eyepiece Possible

5-8-3 Diopter movement range +1.0 to –5.0 diopter (when eye is at eyepiece)

5-8-4 Lens configuration Two elements in two groups

5-9 LCD monitor 2.5-inch Color LCD Approx. 123,000 pixels (560 (H) × 220 (V)) TFT active matrix drive RGB

delta arrangement; ON when LCD monitor not closed (panel facing inwards)

5-9-1 Angle adjustment Possible ; Monitoring is possible for high-angle, low-angle, and mirror shooting


24

5-9-2 Information display Color display of operating mode, simple zoom position, remaining battery charge, remaining

tape, time code, warnings and other indications. The indicators are not displayed during mirror

shooting. 8 languages of Japanese, Chinese (simplified Chinese), English, German, French,

Italian, Spanish and Russian supported.

Relationship between LCD monitor and viewfinder

*1 : Mirror mode possible by menu selection.

*2 : During mirror mode, only or and the self-timer display

appear.

5-10 White balance adjustment TTL 128-segments, new white extraction system FAWB. Includes set / preset (outdoor: 5,600 k;

indoor: 3,200 k)

(selected from camera menu).

5-10-1 Adjustment range 2,800 k to 8,000 k

5-11 Digital feature functions The following modes are provided : Fader, Effects, Multi-screen

Fader : Linked to Start/Stop button. Can be used 1 time when Fade mode displayed.

(Mode indication goes out when Fader ends.)

Effects : Effect continues until mode is turned OFF.

Multi-screen : Loads and displays multiple screens at set interval or manually. Displayed until

mode is turned OFF.

Card mix : Mixes and displays included sample images, images recorded on cards and mo-

tion video.

5-11-1 Fader Audio synchronized fader

(Only in recording on tape) Auto Fade (Japanese model : Fade to white, Overseas model: Fade to black), Wipe, Corner Wipe,

Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide

5-11-1-1 Fade time Approx. 4 sec

5-11-2 Effects Art, Black and White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror (Only Black and

White is available during card recording)

Effect function turned ON / OFF from D. Effect button. Toggle operation

5-11-3 Multi-screen (tape recording only ; excludes Night mode)

5-11-3-1 Number of screens 4 (2 × 2), 9 (3 × 3), 16 (4 × 4)

5-11-3-2 Operation mode Manual, Fast (4 frames), Normal (6 frames), Slow (8 frames)

During Low Light mode, the settings are Fast (4 frames), Normal (8 frames), and Slow (12

frames)

5-12 Card Mix

5-12-1 Mix type Card Chroma Key, Card Lumi. Key, Camera Chroma Key, Card Animation

5-12-2 Mix level adjustment Possible. 32 levels

5-12-3 Animation type 3 types : Corner Animation, Straight Animation or Random Animation (Animation Titles are

already recorded in the supplied SD Memory Card SDC-8M.)

5-12-4 Availability in operation mode

Camera mode, Card / Camera mode VCR mode and Card Playback

LCD panel position LCD panel CVF LCD panel CVF

Panel closed (panel facing inwards) OFF ON OFF ON

Panel closed (panel facing outwards) ON OFF ON OFF

Panel open ON OFF ON OFF

Mirror shooting*2 ON*1 ON ON OFF

Camera

Card (Still Image) Card (Motion Video) Tape (Still Image) Tape (Motion Video)

Fader × × ×

Effect Black and White only Black and White only

Multi-screen × ×

Card Mix × ×


25

5-13 Built-in microphone Stereo using electret condenser microphone

5-13-1 Wind screen function Supported ; AUTO or OFF can be selected (Selected from menu. However, built-in microphone

only.)

5-14 Auxiliary light (MVX250i E, MVX250i E only)

Equipped with white LED

5-14-1 Lighting mode Night+ mode : LED is forcibly lighted.

Super Night mode : LED lights depending on brightness of the subject.

5-15 Other additional functions

5-15-1 Time code Displays recording time (0:00:00 to 7:59:59) and records in sub-code area.

5-15-2 Data code The date and camera information during recording are automatically recorded and can be dis-

played during playback.

a. Time and date Automatic calendar range: January 1, 2004 through December 31, 2030 (the initial setting is

January 1, 2004)

One of the following three formats can be selected for the date / time display.

World clock capability (select the name of your destination city and the date and time are auto-

matically adjusted to the local date and time.) Supports daylight savings time.

During playback, time can be displayed in three different modes (date only, time and date, or

time only). (Time and date can be displayed for January 1, 1990 through December 31, 2089.)

b. Camera data Shutter speed and aperture value information are recorded (but not displayed during recording),

and can be displayed during playback.

5-15-3 Accessory shoe Supported. Advanced accessory shoe supported (MVX250i E only)

5-15-4 REC Search mechanism Supported. Tape can be played (forward or reverse) by pressing the REC Search button while

camera recording is paused. (When REC Search ends, camera recording is paused again.)

5-15-5 REC Review Supported. Accessed by operating the Recording Check button when camera recording is paused

(in Tape mode only).

5-15-6 Zero Set Memory Supported. This function allows you to rewind or fast-forward the tape to the position where the

WL-D83 Zero Set Memory key is pressed (the counter value is set to 0:00:00). (During record-

ing, only zero setting is allowed. This function can be used in Playback mode.) “ M ” display

appears at the far right of the counter.

5-15-7 Remote control reception ON/OFF Possible. This can be done in Camera mode and VCR mode (by selecting from menu).

5-15-8 Headphone volume adjustment Possible. Adjustable with SET button

5-15-9 16:9 shooting High- resolution 16: 9 (CCD extraction equivalent to approx. 790,000 pixels when image stabi-

lizer is ON or CCD extraction equivalent to approx. 920,000 pixels when image stabilizer is

OFF). If 16: 9 mode is selected, the screen switches to a letterbox display (with black bands

(masked) at the top and bottom)). In Tape mode only

5-15-10 AEB shooting Included. (First shot : No correction, Second shot : -0.5 level, Third shot : +0.5 level)

5-15-11 Skin detail mode When skin areas are detected, they are expressed softly, and the small blemishes, lines, etc.

become unnoticeable. ON or OFF setting possible.

5-15-12 Still image check time setting The time used for checking still images can be set after the photo button is pressed and its

operation is released. One of 6 settings; OFF (0 sec), 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 seconds can be selected as

the setting mode.

6 Recorder

6-1 Recording functions Camera shooting and recording, DV input recording**, analog input recording

** : MVX250i E, MVX200i E only

6-1-1 Recording format Consumer electronics digital DVC (SD specs)

6-1-2 Tape speed Approx. 18.83 mm / second (in SP mode), approx. 12.57 mm / second (in LP mode)

6-1-3 DV input recording Complies with IEEE1394.

Records video / audio signals from a digital video camera connected through a DV cable.

6-1-4 Analog input recording Records analog video / audio signals using an S-Video terminal or AV terminal.

(MVX250i E, MVX200i E only)

6-1-5 Priority of terminals during recording DV terminal > S-Video terminal > AV terminal (MVX250i E, MVX200i E only)

6-2 Audio Dubbing Recording Possible. (SD spec tapes only)

6-2-1 Insert-capable tape Only tapes with 12- bit/ SP recording (other than 4- channel simultaneous recording) can be used

in Audio Dubbing Recording.


26

6-2-2 Audio Dubbing signal input Audio signal from LINE (AV terminal) or microphone (external > internal). MVX200i E has no

external microphone terminal. MVX200 E has no external microphone terminal and line in

function.

6-2-3 Switching to Audio Dubbing Press audio dubbing button on remote control while playback is paused.

6-3 Playback functions Standard Playback and Superb Playback

6-3-1 Standard Playback

a. Video Video recorded in SP and LP modes

b. Audio 16-bit Supports the following sampling frequencies : 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz.

12-bit Sampling frequency : 32 kHz

Stereo 1, Stereo 2, or mixed playback of Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 (variable mix ratio)

6-3-2 Special Playback Plays video only

a. Still image playback Pure frame playback

b. Fast-forward playback Approx. 11.5× speed.

c. Rewind playback Approx. 11.5× speed.

d. Frame playback Forward/reverse frame feeding

e. Slow playback Forward/reverse 1/3× speed

f. 1× SP playback Forward/reverse 1× speed

g. 2× SP playback Forward/reverse 2× speed

6-4 Tape fast-forward / rewind time Approx. 2 minutes and 20 seconds (using 60-minute tape)

6-5 Search

6-5-1 Date search If there is more than one recording date, this function cue up to the position where the date

changes. Forward/reverse date search (use the / keys on the remote control after select-

ing Date search with the remote control Search Select key)

Search can be set for up to 10 images before or after the current position.

6-5-4 Index search None

6-5-5 End search When a tape is played back upon completion of the shooting, this function transports the tape to

the position where the shooting last ended, it cues to the end of the shooting on the tape, and then

places the tape in the stop mode. Furthermore, when an end search is being performed, the tape

is played back starting about 4 seconds before the end of the shooting, enabling the image imme-

diately before the end to be checked. However, this function does not work when the tape has

been removed after shooting.

6-6 Input signals

6-6-1 DV terminal SD format signals complying with IEEE1394– AV / C protocol (MVX250i E, MVX200i E only)

6-6-2 AV terminal (MVX250i E, MVX200i E only)

a. Video signals

Types of signals PAL standard color video signals

Impedance 75 ΩSignal level 1Vp-p (composite)

b. Audio signals

Types of signals Stereo audio signals

Impedance Min. 40 kΩSignal level −10dBv

6-6-3 S Video terminal (MVX250i E, MVX200i E only)

Signal configuration PAL Y/C separated video signal

Impedance 75 ΩSignal level 0.3Vp-p (color burst signal)

6-6-4 Microphone terminal Included. (MVX250i E only)

6-6-5 USB terminal Supports USB 2.0 FullSpeed class.

6-7 Output signals (MVX250i E only)

6-7-1 DV terminal SD format signals complying with IEEE1394-AV/C protocol

6-7-2 AV terminal

a. Video signals

Types of signals PAL standard color video signals

Impedance 75 ΩSignal level 1 Vp-p (composite)

Horizontal resolution

Self-recording/playback Approx. 530 TV lines (screen center)

Camera EE OUT Max. approx. 530 TV lines (screen center)


27

b. Audio signals

Types of signals Stereo audio signal

Impedance Max. 3 kΩSignal level −10 dBv

Frequency characteristic 60 Hz to 16 kHz (Range between 1 kHz standard ±3 dB)

Audio signal S/N

Built-in microphone input Min. 48 dB

External microphone input Min. 48 dB (However, the MVX200i E, MVX200 E model does not have an external micro-

phone input terminal.)

6-7-3 S-Video terminal

Signal configuration PAL Y/C separated video signal

Video signals 1 Vp-p (brightness + synchronization signal)

Color signal 0.3 Vp-p (Color burst signal)

Impedance 75 ΩSignal level 0.3 Vp-p (Color burst signal)

Brightness signal S/N Min. 45 dB

Horizontal resolution

Self recording / playback Conforms to camera EE OUT

Camera EE OUT Max. approx. 530 TV lines (screen center)

6-7-4 Headphone terminal φ 3.5 mm stereo mini jack

Output impedance 100 ΩSignal level −25 dBv (with 16 Ω load at maximum volume)

6-7-5 USB terminal Supports USB2.0 FullSpeed class

USB device class Independent class, PTP class, mass storage class, audio class, video class

Compatible computer systems Windows : IBM PC/AT compatible, NEC PC98-NX Series

Macintosh : Power Macintosh, PowerBook, iMac, iBook

PC operating system Windows : Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows ME, Windows 2000, Windows XP

Macintosh : Mac OS 9 or later

6-8 Memory card system

6-8-1 Types of memory cards used SD memory card, Multimedia card

6-8-2 Recordable image types

a. Still image JPEG recording

In Camera mode When [ ] Fine], or [ ] Normal] is selected for [PHOTO REC] on the [CAM SET UP]

menu, still images can be recorded on the memory card by operating the photo button while

motion video is being recorded on the tape. (Tape simultaneous recording function: VGA still

images)

In Card Recording mode Still image is recorded using the Photo button (image size and image quality are selectable).

Writing in Progress warning is displayed in the EVF/ LCD.

During playback mode Still image is recorded using the photo button during tape playback (pressed halfway down for

still image playback and pressed all the way down for recording). (VGA still images)

Also, DV input images (when no tape loaded or loaded tape is stopped) can be recorded by

pressing the photo button (pressing halfway captures still image of the DV input, pressing all the

way down records the image).

b. Motion video AVI (Video data: Motion JPEG / Audio data: WAVE (monoaural))

Records only camera images during Card Record mode and from tape during VCR mode (re-

cording from DV input,

AV input and S- Video input are disabled).

Image quality in recording onto card from tape / DV input

Source Source recording system Image recorded on card

Tape / DV input Progressive or frame motion video recording Progressive or frame image

Tape / DV input Normal motion video recording Simple pure frame image

Analog AV input Normal motion video recording Field image


28

6-8-3 File names/folder names Based on the DCF (Design rule for Camera File systems) and still image (Exif 2.2) file manage-

ment specifications / DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) file management specifications, the

following names are assigned to recorded cards after formatting in the Format menu.

a. Card volume label CANON DV

xxx : Folder No., yyyy : File number, z : A to Z

(*1) Comes from motion video file of same File No.

DCF folder and file name //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG

xxx : folder No., yyyy : file No.

b. File number Files are managed internally by folder No. and file No.

Photographed images are assigned file numbers from 0001 to 9900, and are stored in folders

(100 files to a folder). Each folder is assigned numbers 100 to 998.

Relationship between folder No. and file No.

Photographed images start from 101-0101, and are basically numbered to be greater than Direc-

tory No.- File No. of files saved on MultiMediaCards.

6-8-4 Recorded image size/image quality

a. Still image recording

In tape simultaneous recording 640 × 480 dots(VGA) / Switchable between Fine and Normal

In card / camera mode 1280 × 960 dots (XGA), 640 × 480 dots (VGA) / Switchable between Super Fine, Fine, and

Normal

During tape playback, line input, and card recording of DV input image

640 × 480 dots (VGA) / Switchable between Super Fine, Fine, and Normal

b. Motion video recording (Motion JPEG)

320 × 240, 160 × 120 dots 12.5 frames / sec

Types of files Compression system Folder name and file name

Still image (Exif 2.2) file JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/IMG_yyyy.JPG

Motion video file Motion JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/MVIyyyy.AVI

Motion video thumbnail file (*1) JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/MVIyyyy.THM

Photo stitch JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/STz_yyyy.JPG

Zoom browser JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG

DPOF file TEXT //MISC/AUTPRINT.MRK

Work file TEXT //DCIM/CANONMSC/xxx.tmp

Folder No. File No. Saved files

100 0001 0002 0003 ···· 0099 0100 Sample image included at time of shipping

101 0101 0102 0103 ···· 0199 0200

102 0201 0202 0203 ···· 0299 0300

···

198 9801 9802 9803 ···· 9899 9900 Photographed image recording area

200 0001 0002 0003 ···· 0099 0100

···

998 9801 9802 9803 ···· 9899 9900


29

6-8-5 Number of recorded images / recording time

When a MultiMediaCard is used, the maximum recording time per shot is about 10 sec

(for 320 × 240) or about 30 sec (for 160 × 120).

* The included SDC-8M contains prerecorded title images, therefore the actual number of recorded images will be

less than above.

* The given number of recorded images is only for reference. The number will vary greatly depending on the focal

length, subject and other conditions when taking pictures.

* Windows XP : To connect the ELURA70 / 65 / 60A to a computer, the maximum continuous recording time of

movies on a memory card should be no longer than Approx. 12 minutes in 320 × 240 and 35 minutes in 160 × 120.

SDC-8M SDC-128M

a. Still image recording 1280 × 960dots (SXGA) 640 × 480dots (VGA) 1280 × 960dots (SXGA) 640 × 480dots (VGA)

Super Fine Approx. 6 images Approx. 34 images Approx. 144 images Approx. 709 images

(approx. 850 KB per image) (approx. 175 KB per image) (approx. 850 KB per image) (approx. 175 KB per image)

Fine Approx. 10 images Approx. 50 images Approx. 222 images Approx. 975 images


Normal Approx. 18 images Approx. 84 images Approx. 409 images Approx. 1560 images


b. Motion video recording 320 × 240dots 160 × 120 dots 320 × 240 dots 160 × 120 dots

Maximum recording time Approx. 20 sec Approx. 50 sec Approx. 8 minutes Approx. 17 minutes

Data size per second Approx. 250 KB / sec Approx. 120 KB / sec Approx. 250 KB / sec Approx. 120 KB / sec

SDC-512M

a. Still image recording 1280 × 960dots (SXGA) 640 × 480dots (VGA)

Super Fine Approx. 577 images Approx. 2837 images

(approx. 850 KB per image) (approx. 175 KB per image)

Fine Approx. 891 images Approx. 3902 images

(approx. 550KB per image) (approx. 120KB per image)

Normal Approx. 1641 images Approx. 6243 images

(approx. 300 KB per image) (approx. 65 KB per image)

b. Motion video recording 320 × 240dots 160 × 120 dots

Maximum recording time Approx. 33 minutes Approx. 69 minutes

Data size per second Approx. 250 KB / sec Approx. 120 KB / sec


30

6-8-6 Continuous shooting Number of recorded images in continuous shooting

Fast frame feeding (5 frames / sec; 2 frames / sec when using flash)

Size Image quality VFL-1 Continuous images Remarks

Super Fine When not installed Up to 10 images

Fine (When flash is not Up to 10 images

1280 × 960Normal used) Up to 10 images

Super Fine Up to 10 images Maximum flash

Fine When flash is used Up to 10 images emission is 1/4

Normal Up to 10 images of single shot flash







Normal frame feeding (3 frames / sec; 2 frames / sec when using flash)

Size Image quality VFL-1 Continuous images Remarks














31

6-8-7 Card format Formats using format command in the main unit menu. Operation is not guaranteed with PC

formats as problems can occur with some OS.

6-8-8 Usable memory card

SD memory card San Disk : 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB

Matsushita Electric : 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB

Toshiba : 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB

MultiMediaCard San Disk : 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB

Hitachi : 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB

(However, this does not mean that the operation of all these memory cards is guaranteed.)

6-9 Digital feature playback function The following modes are provided : Fader, Effect, Multi-screen.

· Can be executed once when Fader mode is displayed in conjunction with pressing the button

(the mode display disappears when Fader ends).

· Effects : Effect continues until mode is turned OFF.

· Multi-screen : Loads and displays multiple screens at set interval or manually. Displayed until

mode is turned OFF.

6-9-1 Fader Audio synchronized Fader

Same as in recording mode. Auto Fade (Japanese model: Fade to white, Overseas model : Fade to

black), Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide

Fade time Approx. 4 sec

6-9-2 Effects Same as in recording mode. Art, Black and White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color

Mask, Mirror (only in Tape mode)

Effect function turned ON / OFF from D. Effect button. Toggle operation

6-9-3 Multi-screen

a. Number of screens 4 (2 × 2), 9 (3 × 3), 16 (4 × 4)

b. Screen capture speed Manual, Fast (4 frames), Normal (6 frames), Slow (8 frames)

6-9-4 Card mix Not available

6-9-5 Availability in operation modes

6-10 Direct print Still images recorded on memory cards can be easily printed by connecting to (sold separately)

card photo printers CP-200/300, Camera Direct Printer compatible BJ printers PIXUS 470PD/

JP450i with supplied IFC-300PCU interface cable. DPOF print setup support (max. 200images)

6-10-1 Printable images Only the still images which have been recorded on the SD memory cards or MultiMediaCards.

6-10-2 Print format Single image/8-image print (layout of 8 pictures of same image : only when the card size paper

tray has been installed in the CP200/300). Printing not available from index screen.

6-10-3 Trimming Possible

6-10-4 Date printing Possible (when connected to PictBridge compatible printer except for the CP-200/CP-300.)

6-10-5 Number of print copies Easy Print : 1 to 99 sheets

DPOF printing : Max. 200 images, 1 to 99 each

Playback (VCR / Tape) Card playback

Fader ×

Effects ×

Multi-screen ×

Card Mix × ×


32

6-10-6 Print systems

Print manufacturer Canon Other

manufacturer

Printer specifications

CP specifications

CP specifications +

PictBridgespecifications

BJ Photospecifications only

BJ Photo specifications +

PictBridge specifications

PictBridge specifications only

Suitable printer CP-10/100 CP-200/300BJ-895PD/

535PD/F890PD,PIXUS 50i

PIXUS 990i, 900PD

Printer specifications when connected to MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E(Controlled at printer side)

CP camera directcontrol

CP camera directspecifications

PictBridge control



PictBridge control


PictBridge control

BJ camera direct control

BJ camera direc specifications

When the printer isconnected

DPOF printing screen

Prin

ting

func

tions

Paper size

Paper type

Paper setting

Borders/no borders

8-of-1 screen layout

Sectional printing

Image optimizing

Date printing

Trimming

): When the printer is supported

(When card size paper is used)

(Area selection)

(When card size paper is used)


33

6-11 Other

6-11-1 Consecutive shooting mechanism Can be used starting in Recording Pause or Stop mode, or starting with the power off. This does

not apply to cases where the cassette has been removed.

6-11-2 Automatic stop function When forward still image playback is continued for approx. 5 minutes, or reverse still image

playback is continued for approx. 5 minutes. When a condensation warning is displayed. When

the tape end or beginning is reached.

6-11-3 Power automatic stop function When Recording Pause continues for approx. 5 min. When the battery voltage falls below a

specified value.

6-11-4 Time code Automatically written during recording. Time code values range from 0:00:00:00 to 7:59:59:24

(hours:minutes:seconds:frames).

6-11-5 World clock display Set reference city (city of time clock setting) and select name of city when shooting. Date and

time are automatically adjusted to local date and time, and recorded in data code.

6-11-6 Speaker Built-in, volume control provided

6-11-7 File transfer

a. USB file transfer Still images (JPEG files) and motion video (Motion JPEG files) recorded on memory cards can

be uploaded to a PC and still images (JPEG files) on the PC can be downloaded to memory cards

in the camcorder by connecting the included IFC-300PCU interface cable between a USB port

on the PC and the USB port of the camcorder.

b. DV file transfer Still images (JPEG files) and motion video (Motion JPEG files) recorded on memory cards can

be uploaded to a PC and still images (JPEG files) and motion video (Motion JPEG files) on the

PC can be downloaded to memory cards in the camcorder by connecting a CV-150F (or CV-

250F) DV cable between an IEEE1394 port on the PC and the DV terminal of the camcorder.

6-11-8 Analog / Digital conversion Converts analog AV signals input to the AV terminal into digital DV signals in real-time and

(PAL models excluded) outputs the digital DV signals from the DV terminal.

When an 8 mm video player or VHS video player is connected with the camcorder using an AV

cable, and the camcorder is connected to a PC using a DV cable, playback images can be trans-

ferred from the 8 mm tape or VHS tape to the PC. (Under the VCR settings on the VCR menu

screen, set AV input ⇒ DV output to ON.)

6-11-9 Playback zoom If the zoom lever is flipped to the tele side during image playback from the tape or card (MVX250i

E only, except for motion video), the image being played back can be enlarged to 5 times its size.

When the zoom lever is flipped to the wide side, the enlarged image is returned to its original

size.

Position of the enlarged section during enlarged screen view can be changed by SET button. (On

the LCD monitor, a frame is displayed to show the zoom-in area, and the direction in which the

area can be moved by the SET button is indicated by / .) Toggling between the up/down

and left/right movement direction settings is performed by pressing the SET button. (“Left /

right” is the default setting when the mode is transferred to zoom-in.)

6-11-10 Battery charging function When the CA-570 Canon compact power adapter is connected, the battery pack installed in the

battery pack compartment can be charged. (During charging, the charge lamp flashes (one flash

with a charge level of 0% to 50%, and two flashes with a charge level of more than 50%) or it

lights (when the charging is complete with a charge level of 97% or more)).

Charging time NB-2L : Approx. 110 min., NB-2LH : Approx. 115 min.,

(when power switch is at OFF) BP-2L12 : Approx. 180 min., BP-2L14 : Approx. 210 min.

6-11-11 Simultaneous still image If the photo button is pressed while motion video is recorded to tape, still images

recording (image size : 640 × 480, image quality : Selectable from Fine or Normal) can be recorded on the

memory card.

6-11-12 Accessory shoe Support for advanced accessory shoe (MVX250i E model), No support for advanced accessory

shoe (MVX200i E, MVX200 E model)

6-11-13 Recording lamp None


34

6-12 Terminal

6-12-1 DV terminal Special 4-pin (IEEE1394 compatible) ; input and output

(MVX200i E, MVX200 E model has output only.)

6-12-2 S-Video terminal 4-pin mini-DIN ; input and output

6-12-3 AV (Audio / Video) terminal φ 3.5 mm 4-pole pin jack (yellow) ; input / output

(output only on MVX200i E, MVX200 E model) ; Also serves as headphone terminal

6-12-4 External microphone input Included (However, except for MVX200i E, MVX200 E model)

terminal

6-12-5 Headphone terminal φ 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack (also serves as AV terminal)

6-12-6 Memory card connection Special multi-pin

terminal

6-12-7 Battery terminal Special 3-pin

6-12-8 DC IN terminal φ 3.4 mm jack (for connecting CA-570)

6-12-9 USB terminal 5-pin (mini-B Receptacle)

7 Power supply

7-1 Input power supply 7.4V DC (battery pack), 8.4V DC (DC IN).

7-2 Power consumption During recording : Approx. 2.6 W (using EVF) ; Approx. 3.3 W (using LCD monitor)

During playback : Approx. 2.8 W (using LCD monitor)

8 Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 74 × 78 × 130 mm (2.9 × 3.1 × 5.1 in) (Protrusions excluded)

Approx. 79 × 78 × 130 mm (3.1 × 3.1 × 5.1 in) (Maximum width with protrusious)

9 Weight

9-1 Body MVX250i E : Approx. 500 g (1.1 lb)

MVX200i E, MVX200 E : Approx. 500 g (1.1 lb)

9-2 Total equipped weight MVX250i E : Approx. 560 g (1.2 lb)

MVX200i E, MVX200 E : Approx. 560 g (1.2 lb)

(Including NB-2LH, DVM-E30, lens cap, lithium coin battery, and SDC-8M)

MVX250i E : Approx. 600 g (1.3 lb)

(Including BP-2L14, DVM-E30, lens cap, lithium coin battery, and SDC-8M)

10 Temperature and humidity requirements

10-1 Temperature and humidity requirements for performance

0 to 40°C, 85% (relative humidity)

10-2 Temperature and humidity requirements for operation

−5 to 40°C, 65% (relative humidity)


35

4. System Diagram (Common to all Models)

Fig. 2

VFL-1 Video Flash Light

VL-3 Video Light

DM-50 DirectionalStereo Microphone

CV-150F/CV-250FDV Cable

S-150 S-video Cable

MultiMediaCard

IFC-300PCU USB Cable

Canon printers with direct print function /PictBridge-compliant printers

PC Card Adapter

USB Reader/Writer

BP-900 Series Battery Pack

Stereo Microphone (commercially available)

VL-10Li Battery Video Light

WL-D83 Wireless Controller

MiniDVVideo Cassette

Digital Device

Computer

NB-2L, NB-2LH, BP-2L12, BP-2L14Battery Pack

WD-H34Wide-converter

FS-34U Filter Set

TL-H34Tele-converter

SDC-128MSD Memory Card

SS-900 Shoulder Strap

WS-20 Wrist Strap

SC-2000 Soft Carrying Case

CA-570 Compact Power Adapter

TV

VCR

CBC-NB2Car Battery Charger

CB-2LTEBattery Charger

NB-2L, NB-2LH, BP-2L12, BP-2L14Battery Pack

STV-250N Stereo Video Cable

PC-A10 SCART Adapter


36

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

Camera mode

Zoom / Exposure correction

bar display

(displayed for approx.

four seconds after zoom operation)

Zoom bar display

Optical Zoom W T

72× digital zoom W T MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 56×

360× digital zoom W T MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 280×

Zooming is stopped W T

Zooming to telephoto end W T

Zooming to wide end W T

Exposure correction bar display

Minimum correction : -11 level

Correction default setting

Maximum correction : +11 level

Displayed by correctable range

During Full Auto No display

Image stabilizer display

The image stabilizer is ON

The image stabilizer is OFF No display

Recording mode display

SP recording

LP recording

5. Overview of viewfinder / LCD panel displays

5-1 Camera mode


37


Operating mode display

Recording

Recording Pause

Playback is stopped

Cassette is ejected

+ REC Search

- REC Search

Program AE mode display

Full Auto mode is selected Always displayed

Auto mode is selected A Displayed for approx.

4 seconds and then turns OFF.

Sports mode is selected

Portrait mode is selected

Spotlight mode is selected

Surf & Snow mode is selected After displayed for approx. 4 seconds,

Low Light mode is selected only characters are displayed.

Night mode is selected

Night+ mode is selected* MVX250i E only

Super Night mode is selected* MVX250i E only

Program AE mode menu

A

Skin detail mode display

Skin detail mode is selected

Skin detail mode is not selected No display

Tape counter display

Time code display

Not entered

Zero Set Memory M

M

M

Not entered M


38


EXP lock display

Minimum exposure compensation value

Default setting

Maximum exposure value

During Full Auto No display

Tape information display

Remaining tape display

Tape end

Not entered

Tape warning display flashes

Other No display

Shutter speed display When Auto mode is selected

1/50 sec is selected






Timer display

During recording

Self-timer is activated

Mirror shooting Displays large in screen center.

Displayed with right and left sides

reversed when Mirror is set to ON.


39


Remaining battery level display Approx. 100% remaining

Approx. 75% remaining



Approx. 0% remaining,

warning display (flashes red)

Power adapter is attached No display

Focus mode display

AF is set to OFF

AF is set to ON No display

Set to infinity

Lithium coin battery warning flashes red

Condensation warning display flashes red

White balance display

Set

Indoor preset

Outdoor preset

Auto No display

Remote control code display

Code setting 1 is selected

Code setting 2 is selected

Remote controller receive OFF is selected

Card Mix display

Headphone volume display

When volume is adjusted

When volume is at off


40


Digital feature display

Auto Fade is selected

Wipe is selected

Corner Wipe is selected

Jump is selected

Flip is selected

Puzzle is selected

Zigzag is selected

Beam is selected

Tide is selected

Art is selected

Black and White is selected

Sepia is selected

Mosaic is selected

Ball is selected

Cube is selected

Wave is selected

Color Mask is selected

Mirror is selected

Multi-screen is selected

Digital feature are turned OFF No display

Digital feature menu


41

Digital feature selection

Press the DIGITAL EFFECT button.

The line where the cursor is located in the menu is displayed with a turquoise background.

The previously selected items and the corresponding settings are shown in yellow.

OFF

In Fader Selection

In Effect Selection

In Multi Screen Selection In Multi Screen Speed Selection

In Multi Screen Count Selection


42


Wind screen display

Auto Wind Screen is turned ON No display

Auto Wind Screen is turned OFF

Area Summer Time display

Area Summer Time display

Time and date is not set

* The desired style can be selected from among the styles shown above.

Flash display (activated when VFL-1 is attached)

When Auto Flash is selected

When Red-eye Reduction

Auto Flash is selected

When Flash On is selected

When Flash Off is selected

Audio mode display

12-bit

16-bit

16:9 mode display

When 16:9 shooting is selected

when it is not selected No display

Photo half-pressed lock display

AF / AE operation in progress flashes

After AF / AE lock green light

Advanced shoe information

When a valid connection is made to C

DM-50, VFL-1, or VL-3

When accessory is not connected No display

Card information display

When OFF is selected in still image No display

recording

When Fine is selected

When Normal is selected


43

5-2 VCR mode


VCR mode

Audio 12-bit output display

When 12-bit Stereo 1 is selected

When 12-bit Stereo 2 is selected

When 12-bit mixed 1:1 is selected

When 12-bit mixed variable is selected

16-bit No display

Mix balance display

Mix ratio 1:0

Mix ratio 1:1

Mix ratio 0:1

Recording mode display

SD mode SP recording

LP recording


During recording Red display

During recording pause

Cassette is ejected

Playback is stopped

Playback

Fast forward

Rewind

No tape

Fast playback

2× speed playback

1× speed playback

Slow playback

Frame playback

Still image playback

Still image reverse playback


44


Frame reverse playback

Slow reverse playback

1× SP reverse playback

2× SP reverse playback

Rewind playback

Forward date search

Reverse date search

FF return

REW return

Audio dubbing pause

Audio dubbing recording

Tape counter

Time code display

Not entered

Zero Set Memory Same as during Camera mode

Remaining tape display Same as during Camera mode

Audio dubbing /

search operation display

Audio dubbing is selected

Data search operation

When end search is selected

Other than search No display

Remaining battery level display Same as during camera mode

Lithium coin battery Warning display Same as during camera mode

Condensation warning display Same as during camera mode

Remote control code display Same as during camera mode

Digital feature display Same as during camera mode


45


Speaker / Headphone volume

adjustment display

When Speaker is selected

When volume is at OFF

When Headphone is selected Same as during camera mode

Wind screen display Same as during camera mode

Data code display

Data code settings

Time and date Camera data Date and time &camera data

Time setting

Date setting

Date & time settings

Dat

e an

d tim

e se

lect

ion

Camera data

Aperture value display This product’s aperture value is

from F1.8

Aperture fully close There is no Aperture Fully

Close function in this product

Not entered

Shutter speed display This product’s shutter speed is

1/2 sec to 1/2000 sec

Not entered


46


Time display

Time setting is selected

Not entered

Time and time setting are selected

Not entered

Data display

Not entered

Audio mode display

Audio mode display Same as during camera mode

Audio input display

Audio input terminal is selected

Microphone terminal is selected

16:9 mode display

16:9 tape playback

Normal tape play back No display

Advanced shoe information

When a valid connection is made to C

DM-50, VFL-1, or VL-3

When accessory is not connected No display

DV input display

AV DV signal conversion is selected

Other No display

Playback zoom display


47

5-3 Card / Camera mode


Card/Camera mode

Zoom/Exposure correction display

Zoom/Exposure correction display Same as Camera mode

(except that Digital zoom is 72/64/56× only)

Over exposure warning (flashes) Caution is indicated when F11 or higher

Continuous shot / AEB mode display

When Continuous Shooting mode

is selected

When fast continuous shot mode

is selected

When AEB mode is selected

When Single Shot mode is selected No display

Card recording quality display

Program AE mode display Same as during Camera mode

Skin detail mode display Same as during Camera mode

Stitch Assist quantity display Clockwise

Counter-clockwise

Image stabilizer warning display Displayed when the shutter speed is

1/60 second or less

Card access display Writing and reading


48


Card remaining display

No card (flashes red)

9999 or more images can be recorded

99 images can be recorded

5 images can be recorded

Yellow display

1 image scan be recorded

EXP lock display Same as during Camera/Tape mode

Self-timer display Same as during Camera mode

Still image size display

1280 × 768 is selected


Motion video size display



Shutter speed display

Focus mode display Same as during Camera mode

Remaining battery level display Same as during Camera mode

White balance display Same as during Camera mode

AF frame display

AF priority Center only during green mode

After three seconds, the green display

section only appears white.


49


Lithium coin battery Same as during Camera mode

low power warning display

Condensation warning display Same as during Camera mode

Remote control code display Same as during Camera mode

Digital feature display Black and White only

Wind screen display Same as during Camera mode

Area Summer Time display Same as during Camera mode

Time and date display Same as during Camera mode

(date and time only)

Flash display Same as during Camera mode

Photo half-pressed lock display Same as during Camera mode

Advanced shoe information Same as during Camera mode

Motion video available

recording time display

hour : minutes

Headphone volume adjustment display Same as during Camera mode

Photo half-pressed lock display Same as during Camera mode

Stitch Assist operation guide


50

5-4 Card Playback mode

5-4-1 Still image Playback


Card Playback mode (Still images)

Title display

Slide show

Card playback

Send designation mark display

Print mark display

Protect mark display

DCF file name display

Directory number-File number

PC USB connection display

When not connected No display

Card access display

Image number display

No card Red flashing display

Checking number of images

recorded on card

0 recorded images

9th of 99 recorded images




51


Data code display Same as during VCR mode


Playback zoom operation guide display Same as during VCR playback mode

Slideshow operation guide display

5-4-2 Motion video (Motion JPEG) Playback

Motion video

(Motion JPEG)

Card information display

No card Red flashing display

Checking number of images recorded

on card

0 recorded images




Motion video size display

Speaker/headphone volume adjustment Same as during VCR mode


Playback

Playback pause

Data code display Same as during VCR mode


Total playback time display

Lap time display


52

5-4-3 Direct printing


Card Playback mode

(Direct printing)

Printer connected display

CP Direct compatible printer SET

PictBridge compatible printer SET

Bubble Jet Direct compatible printer SET

53

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 EGENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCTUCT

5-5 Menu Display

The menu display has Camera mode, VCR mode, Card/Camera mode, and Card Playback mode.

Camera Mode

MAIN MENU ITEM SUB MENU ITEM SETTINGS DEFAULT BACKUP

CARD MIX Switches to Card mix selection screen

CAMERA SET UP SHUTTER AUTO AUTO Lithium battery

1/50

1/120

1/250

1/500

1/1000

1/2000

A. SL SHUTTER ON ON Lithium battery

OFF

D. ZOOM *1 OFF Lithium battery

72× / 64× / 56× 72× / 64× / 56×360× / 320× / 280×

IMAGE STAB ON ON Lithium battery

OFF

16 : 9 ON OFF Lithium battery

OFF

WHIT BAL. AUTO AUTO Lithium battery

SET

INDOOR

OUTDOOR

FLASH *2 AUTO AUTO Lithium battery

RED-EYE

FLASH ON

FLASH OFF

AF AST LAMP *2 AUTO AUTO Lithium battery

OFF

NIGHT MODE *3 NIGHT Lithium batteryNIGHT+

S.NIGHT

SKIN DETAIL SOFT NORMAL Reset by turning power off

NORMAL

PHOTO REC *2 OFF

FINE Lithium battery

NORMAL

RETURN

VCR SET UP REC MODE SP SP Lithium battery

LP

AV/PHONES AV AV Lithium battery

PHONES

RETURN

54



AUDIO SET UP WIND SCREEN AUTO AUTO Lithium battery

OFF

AUDIO MODE 16 bit 12 bit Lithium battery

12 bit

VOLUME Lithium battery

RETURN

DISPLAY SET UP/ BRIGHTNESS Lithium battery

LCD MIRROR ON ON Lithium battery

OFF

TV SCREEN ON ON Lithium battery

OFF

D/T DISPLAY ON OFF Lithium battery

OFF

LANGUAGE DEUTSCH ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

FRANÇAIS

ITALIANO

PyCCKИИИИИЙЙЙЙЙ

中文

日本語

DATE FORMAT 2004. 1. 1 1. JAN. 2004

AM 12:00 12:00 AM

JAN. 1, 2004

12:00 AM

1. JAN. 2004

12:00 AM

DEMO MODE ON ON Lithium battery

OFF

RETURN

SYSTEM WL. REMOTE Lithium battery

OFF

BEEP ON ON Lithium battery

OFF

55



SYSTEM T. ZONE/DST LONDON PARIS Lithium battery

LONDON

PARIS

PARIS

· · · · · ·

CAIRO

MOSCOW

DUBAI

KARACHI

DACCA

BANGKOK

H.KONG

TOKYO

SYDNEY

SOLOMON

WELLGTN.

SAMOA

HONOLU.

ANCHOR.

L.A.

DENVER

CHICAGO

N.Y.

CARACAS

RIO

· · · · · ·

FERNAN.

FERNAN.

AZORES

AZORES

D/TIME SEL 1. JAN. 2004 1. JAN. 2004 Lithium battery

12:00 AM 12:00 AM

31. DEC. 2030

11:59 PM

RETURN

MY CAMERA S-UP SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery

DEFAULT

MY SOUND

SHTR SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery

DEFAULT

MY SOUND

OPER. SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery

DEFAULT

MY SOUND

SELF-T SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery

DEFAULT

MY SOUND

RETURN

CLOSE

*1: Model MVX250i E : 72× / 360×, model MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 56× / 280×*2: Models MVX250i E, when VFL-1 is attached

*3: Models MVX250i E only

56


VCR Mode


VCR SET UP REC MODE SP SP Lithium battery

LP

AV/PHONES AV AV Lithium battery

PHONES

AV DV OUT *1 ON OFF Reset by turning

OFF power off

RETURN

AUDIO SET UP OUTPUT CH L/R L/R Reset by turning

L/L power off

R/R

AUDIO DUB. *1 AUDIO IN AUDIO IN Lithium battery

MIC. IN

WIND SCREEN AUTO AUTO Lithium battery

OFF

AUDIO MODE 16bit 12bit Lithium battery

12bit

12bit AUDIO STEREO1 STEREO1 Reset by turning

STEREO2 power off

MIX/FIXED

MIX/VARI.

MIX BALANCE Lithium battery

RETURN

CARD SET UP *2 IMG QUALITY SUPER FINE FINE Lithium battery

FINE

NORMAL

MOVIE SIZE 320 × 240 320 × 240 Lithium battery

160 × 120

FILE NOS. RESET CONTINUOUS Lithium battery

CONTINUOUS

RETURN



OFF

DISPLAYS ON ON Lithium battery

OFF <PLAYBK>

6 SEC. DATE ON OFF Lithium battery

OFF

DATA CODE DATE/TIME DATE/TIME Lithium battery

CAMERA DATA

CAM. & D/T

D/TIME SEL. DATE DATE & TIME Lithium battery

TIME

DATE & TIME

57



DISPLAY SET UP/ LANGUAGE DEUTSCH ENGLISH

ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

FRANÇAIS

ITALIANO


中文

日本語

DATE FORMAT 2004. 1. 1 1. JAN. 2004

AM 12:00 12:00 AM

JAN. 1, 2004

12:00 AM

1. JAN. 2004

12:00 AM

RETURN


OFF


OFF

T. ZONE/DST LONDON PARIS Lithium battery

LONDON

PARIS

PARIS

· · · · · ·

CAIRO

MOSCOW

DUBAI

KARACHI

DACCA

BANGKOK

H.KONG

TOKYO

SYDNEY

SOLOMON

WELLGTN.

SAMOA

HONOLU.

ANCHOR.

L.A.

DENVER

CHICAGO

N.Y.

CARACAS

RIO

· · · · · ·

FERNAN.

FERNAN.

AZORES

AZORES

D/TIME SEL JAN. 1, 2004 1. JAN. 2004 Lithium battery

12:00 AM 12:00 AM

31. DEC. 2030

11:59 PM

RETURN

58



MY CAMERA SHTR SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery

DEFAULT

MY SOUND

S-UP SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery

DEFAULT

MY SOUND


DEFAULT

MY SOUND


DEFAULT

MY SOUND

RETURN

CLOSE

*1 : Excluding model MVX200 E

59


Card / Camera Mode


CAMERA SET UP SHUTTER AUTO AUTO Lithium battery

1/50

1/120

1/250

A. SL SHUTTER ON ON Lithium battery

OFF

D. ZOOM OFF OFF Lithium battery

72× / 64× / 56×WHIT BAL. AUTO AUTO Lithium battery

SET

INDOOR

OUTDOOR

FLASH *1 AUTO AUTO Lithium battery

RED-EYE

FLASH ON

FLASH OFF

AF AST LAMP *1 AUTO AUTO Lithium battery

OFF

FOCUS PRI. ON ON Lithium battery

OFF

ND AUTO AUTO Lithium battery

OFF

NIGHT MODE *2 NIGHT NIGHT+ Lithium batteryNIGHT+

S.NIGHT

SKIN DETAIL SOFT NORMAL Reset by turning power off

NORMAL

REVIEW OFF 2sec Lithium battery

2sec

4sec

6sec

8sec

10sec

RETURN

CARD SET UP IMG QUALITY SUPER FINE FINE Lithium battery

FINE

NORMAL

IMG SIZE 1280 × 960 1280 × 960 Lithium battery

640 × 480

MOVIE SIZE 320 × 240 320 × 240 Lithium battery

160 × 120

FILE NOS. RESET CONTINUOS Lithium battery

CONTINUOS

RETURN

VCR SET UP AV/PHONES AV AV Reset by turning power off

PHONES

RETURN

AUDIO SET UP WIND SCREEN ON OFF Lithium battery

OFF

VOLUME Lithium battery

RETURN

60




LCD MIRROR ON ON Lithium battery

OFF


OFF

D/T DISPLAY ON OFF Lithium battery

OFF


ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

FRANÇAIS

ITALIANO


中文

日本語

DATE FORMAT 2004. 1. 1 1. JAN. 2004

AM 12:00 12:00 AM

JAN. 1, 2004

12:00 AM

1. JAN. 2004

12:00 AM

DEMO MODE ON ON Lithium battery

OFF

RETURN


OFF


OFF

61


*1 : Displayed only when VFL-1 is attached, Models MVX250i E only*2 : Models MVX250i E only



LONDON

PARIS

PARIS

· · · · · ·

CAIRO

MOSCOW

DUBAI

KARACHI

DACCA

BANGKOK

H.KONG

TOKYO

SYDNEY

SOLOMON

WELLGTN.

SAMOA

HONOLU.

ANCHOR.

L.A.

DENVER

CHICAGO

N.Y.

CARACAS

RIO

· · · · · ·

FERNAN.

FERNAN.

AZORES

AZORES


12:00 AM 12:00 AM

31. DEC. 2030

11:59 PM

RETURN

MY CAMERA S-UP SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery

DEFAULT

MY SOUND


DEFAULT

MY SOUND


DEFAULT

MY SOUND


DEFAULT

MY SOUND

RETURN

CLOSE

62


Card Playback Mode (Card/VCR mode)


CARD OPERATIONS PRINT ORDERS Switches to erase all print designations screen

(for single screen) ALL ERASE

TRANSFER ORDERS Switches to erase send designations screen

ALL ERASE

IMAGE ERASE CANCEL None

SINGLE

ALL

FORMAT CANCEL None

EXECUTE

RETURN

CARD OPERATIONS PROTECT Switches to image protect screen

(for index screen)

PRINT ORDER Switches to print designations screen

TRANSFER Switches to send designations screen

ORDER

RETURN

VCR SET UP AV/PHONES AV AV Reset by turning power off

PHONES

RETURN



OFF

DISPLAY ON ON Lithium battery

OFF <PLAYBK>

D/TIME SEL. DATE DATE & TIME Lithium battery

TIME

DATE & TIME


ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

FRANÇAIS

ITALIANO


中文

日本語

DATE FORMAT 2004. 1. 1 1. JAN. 2004

AM 12:00 12:00 AM

JAN. 1, 2004

12:00 AM

1. JAN. 2004

12:00 AM

RETURN


OFF


OFF

63




LONDON

PARIS

PARIS

· · · · · ·

CAIRO

MOSCOW

DUBAI

KARACHI

DACCA

BANGKOK

H.KONG

TOKYO

SYDNEY

SOLOMON

WELLGTN.

SAMOA

HONOLU.

ANCHOR.

L.A.

DENVER

CHICAGO

N.Y.

CARACAS

RIO

· · · · · ·

FERNAN.

FERNAN.

AZORES

AZORES


12:00 AM 12:00 AM

31. DEC. 2030

11:59 PM

RETURN

MY CAMERA CREATE START-UP IMAGE Switches to startup image creation screen

SEL. S-UP IMG. OFF CANON LOGO Lithium battery

CANON LOGO

MY PICTURE

S-UP SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery

DEFAULT

MY SOUND


DEFAULT

MY SOUND


DEFAULT

MY SOUND


DEFAULT

MY SOUND

RETURN

CLOSE


64


Slideshow screen

Image setup screen

Index screen

Image protect screen

5-6 Card-related screen displays


65


Print designations screen

Send designations screen

Image erase screen

Image erase selection screen

Erasing one image

Warning: Erasing in progress


66


Image erase screen

Erasing all images

Format screen

Format execution confirmation screen

Format execution screen


67


Card mix selection screen

Mix type setting screen

Animation type setting screen

Mix level setting screen


68


Stitch assist screen

My camera settings

My camera settings screen

Startup image creation screen

Recording position selection


69


My camera settings

Record execution confirmation

Message being created

Startup image selection screen

Startup sound selection screen

Select Shutter Sound screen


70


My camera settings

Operation sound selection screen

Self-timer sound selection screen

PC connection screen

During USB connection

During IEEE1394 connection


71

MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL

Direct print setting screen

Direct print setting initial screen

Print selection screen PC Direct (CP-10/100) and PictBridge compatible printer

BJ Direct (Pixus 50i) compatible printers (CP-200/300, Pixus 990i)

BORDERED

CARD#1

STYLE

PRINT CANCEL

DEFAULT

DEFAULT

DEFAULT

TRIMMING

1 COPIES

CANCEL

PAPER

OFF

OFF

1 COPIES

TRIMMINGPRINT

Cancel print screen

STOPSTOP

NOW PRINTING (1/3)NOW PRINTING (1/3)

CARD#1

BORDERED

DEFAULT

DEFAULT

DEFAULT

Cancel selection screen

BORDERED

CARD#1

STYLE

PRINT CANCEL

DEFAULT

DEFAULT

DEFAULT

CANCEL

PAPER

OFF

OFF

1 COPIES

TRIMMINGPRINT

TRIMMING

1 COPIES

5-7 Direct print setting screen


72



Quantity setting screen PC Direct (CP-10/100) and PictBridge compatible printer


BORDERED

CARD#1

STYLE

PRINT

TRIMMING

CANCEL

3 COPIES

DEFAULT

DEFAULT

DEFAULT

CANCEL

PAPER

OFF

OFF

3 COPIES

TRIMMINGPRINT

Trimming setting screen

BORDERED

CARD#1

STYLE

PRINT CANCEL

DEFAULT

DEFAULT

DEFAULT

TRIMMING

1 COPIES

CANCEL

PAPER

OFF

OFF

1 COPIES

TRIMMINGPRINT


73



Paper setting, PC Direct (CP-10/100) and PictBridge compatible printer

paper size setting screen BJ Direct (Pixus 50i) compatible printers (CP-200/300, Pixus 990i)

STYLE

PAPER

CARD#1

MENU

PAPER

CARD#1

STYLE

MENU

PAPER

CARD#2

STYLE

MENU

MENU SET

MENU SET

PAPERSIZE

PAPERSIZE

PAPERSIZE

NEXTCANCEL

MENU SET NEXTCANCEL

NEXTCANCEL

CARD#1

CARD#2

CARD#3

8.5"x11"

A4

DEFAULT

CARD#1

CARD#2

CARD#3

8.5"x11"

A4

DEFAULT

CARD#1

CARD#2

CARD#3

8.5"x11"

A4

DEFAULT

* Only paper sizes supported by the

printer can be selected from among

Default, L, 2L, Postcard, Card, 4 ×

6, Letter, Letter, A4, Roll (L), Roll

(2L), Roll (A4), and 5 × 7.

* Camera Direct compatible BJ print-

ers only.


74



Paper type setting screen PC Direct (CP-10/100) and PictBridge compatible printer


MENU SET NEXTPREVIOUS

PAPERTYPE

PHOTOFAST PHOTO DEFAULT


PAPERTYPE



PAPERTYPE


No function

* Only paper types supported by the se-

lected paper size can be selected from

among Default, Photo Paper and Fast

Photo Paper.


75



Borders/no borders setting, PC Direct (CP-10/100) and PictBridge compatible printer

8-of-1 screen layout selection screen BJ Direct (Pixus 50i) compatible printers (CP-200/300, Pixus 990i)

BORDERS

BORDERED

MENU

STYLE

BORDERS

BORDERLESS

STYLE

MENU

BORDERS

BORDERED

STYLE

MENU




LAYOUT

LAYOUT

LAYOUTBORDERLESSBORDEREDDEFAULT

BORDERLESSBORDEREDDEFAULT

BORDERLESSBORDEREDDEFAULT

Split screen (CP-10/100) and

8-of-1 screen layout setting

(CP-200/CP-300)

MENU MENU SET NEXTPREVIOUS

LAYOUT

BORDERLESSBORDERED

DEFAULT

IMAGE

MULTIPLE

STYLE


76


Print designations screen PC Direct (CP-10/100) and PictBridge compatible printer


STYLE

RESUME

O K CANCEL

PRINT ALL MARKED IMAGES

99 CARD #1BORDER-LESS

RESUME CANCEL

PRINT

PAPER

PRINT ALL MARKED IMAGES

98 OFF

OFFDEFAULT

DEFAULT

DEFAULT

Cancel print screen

99

STOP

NOW PRINTING(1/99)

CARD #1

BORDER-LESS 98

STOP

NOW PRINTING(1/98)

OFF

OFFDEFAULT

DEFAULT

BORDERLESS

Restart print screen

98

98 IMAGES REMAINING STOP PRINTING?

CARD

BORDER-LESS 98

98 IMAGES REMAININGSTOP PRINTING?

OFF

OFFDEFAULT

DEFAULT

BORDERLESS

OK CANCEL OK CANCEL

Style setting screen

CARD #1BORDER-LESSSTYLE

RESUME

O K CANCEL

CHANGE PRINT STYLE

99

No function

5-8 Print designations


77

5-9 Warning displays

COPYRIGHT PROTECTED PLAYBACK IS RESTRICTED• When copy-protected tape is played.

COPYRIGHT PROTECTED DUBBING RESTRICTED• When copy protection information is detected during DV input or LINE input, or when the signal output from the television or

VCR is garbled during analog input.

SET THE TIME ZONE, DATE AND TIME• When the power is turned on without setting the area and/or time and date.

REMOVE THE CASSETTE• When a cassette is inserted while there is a mechanical error or condensation in the unit.

CHECK THE DV INPUT• When “REC” is pressed in a mode that allows transition to REC, without a connection to DV input, or in a condition where the

connected DV input cannot be recognized.

CHANGE THE BATTERY PACK• When the battery power is low.

CONDENSATION HAS BEEN DETECTED• When condensation is detected (if a cassette is inserted, a “REMOVE THE CASSETTE” message appears).

THE TAPE IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION• When “REC” is pressed in a mode that allows transition to REC in VCR mode, if the cassette is set for erasure prevention. In

Camera mode, when the power is turned ON, when the “Start/Stop” button is pressed, and when a cassette is inserted.

TAPE END• When the tape end is detected, or when a key (FF, PLAY, etc.) which drives the tape forward is pressed in a mode that allows

transition to forward driving during the detection process.

CHECK THE CASSETTE [REC MODE]• When the Audio Dubbing or AV Insert button is pressed at a tape position recorded in LP, or when LP mode is detected during

Audio Dubbing.

CHECK THE CASSETTE [AUDIO MODE]• When the Audio Dubbing button is pressed at a tape position with 16-bit or 4-channel simultaneous recording, or when 16-bit

mode or 4-channel simultaneous recording mode is detected during audio dubbing.

CHECK THE CASSETTE [BLANK]• When a blank tape area is detected during Audio Dubbing.

CHECK THE CASSETTE


78

HEADS DIRTY, USE CLEANING CASSETTE• When a print head is clogged.

CARD ERROR• When a card error occurs and data cannot be recorded on the card.

CARD FULL• When the card is full.

NAMING ERROR• When the maximum number of file numbers and directory numbers are created.

UNIDENTIFIABLE IMAGE• When an attempt is made to playback an image in an unplayable format, an incompatible JPEG image, or an image with corrupt

data.

PRINT ORDER ERROR• When there are too many print marks (100 or more), or when a mark file cannot be edited.

NO CARD• When there is no card in the camcorder socket.

NO IMAGES• When there are no images to be played in the card.

THE CARD IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION• When an attempt is made to record on an SD card set for erasure prevention, in a mode that allows card recording (VCR mode,

Card Recording mode).

NOW CREATING START-UP IMAGE• The startup screen is being written to flash memory.

THIS IMAGE CANNOT BE USED AS START-UP IMAGE

IN CARD POSITION• When Start/Stop button is pressed in the Camera mode.

THIS IMAGE CANNOT BE RECORDED• (Models MVX250i E)

DIFFERENT CARD FORMAT• When the card format is not supported by the camcorder.


79

PAPER ERROR• When there is a problem with the paper.

NO PAPER• When the paper has not been inserted into the printer properly or there is no paper in the printer

PAPER JAM• When the paper has jammed during printing.

NO INK• When the ink has not been installed properly or the ink has run out.

LOW INK LEVEL• When there is not much ink left.

WASTE TANK FULL• When the waste ink tank is full.

CANNOT PRINT !• When trying to print a still image recorded by a different camcorder, a still image in a different format, or a still image that was

loaded to a computer and edited.

COULD NOT PRINT * IMAGES• When trying to use the DPOF settings to print a * still images recorded by a different camcorder, a still images in a different

format, or a still images that was loaded to a computer and edited.

SET PRINT ORDER• When trying to use the PRINT command in the Card Playback menu to print a still image not designated for printing.

CANNOT TRIM• When an attempt has been made to trim still images with a 160 × 120 image size. Alternatively, when an attempt has been made

to trim images whose aspect ratio differs significantly from 4:3.

READJUST TRIMMING• When the “Style” setting has been changed after trimming was set.

PRINTER ERROR• When trouble has occurred in the printer.

COMMUNICATION ERROR• When an error has occurred during communication.

PRINTER IN USE


80

PRINTER WARMING UP• When the printer is getting ready.

PAPER LEVER ERROR• When the printer’s paper lever is not at the correct position.

PRINTER COVER OPEN• When the printer’s cover is open.

NO PRINTHEAD• When the ink head has not been installed in the printer.

FIRMWARE UPDATED

INCOMPATIBLE PEPAR SIZE• When an unavailable paper size was selected in the paper size menu after displaying the paper size menu and changing the

settings at the printer side.

CHECK PRINT SETTINGS• When the printer setting status displays the current recording value and the Easy Direct button was pressed even though this

value cannot be used by PictBridge when the printer is connected.

PRINT ERROR• When a printer error occurs due to unknown reason.

SEND DESIGNATION ERROR

TOO MANY IMAGES DISCONNECT CABLE

CANNOT TRANSFER!• When the Easy Direct button was pressed when a motion video was displayed (SET UP icon and the icons to its right gray out,

and the Easy Direct button lights up) while “PC Wallpaper” was set.

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTON

CONTENTS

1. P.C.B. Functions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1

2. Power Supply Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3

2-1 Startup of Power Supply ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3

2-2 Power Fuses ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5

2-3 Power Supply Circuits ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6

3. Built-in Charger Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7

3-1 Outline ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7

3-2 Operation at Charging ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

3-2-1 Conditions to Start Charging ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8

3-2-2 Progress of Charging --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9

4. Signal Processing Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10

4-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10

4-2 Camera/Card Signal Processing ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11

4-2-1 Camera Motion Picture Recording --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11

4-2-2 Card Still Picture Recording ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11

4-2-3 Card Motion Picture Recording ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12

4-3 Recorder Signal Processing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13

4-4 Audio Signal Flow --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14

5. System Control, Servo ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15

5-1 Outline of System Control, Servo ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15

5-2 Major Functions of Each MI-COM -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16

5-3 Servo Control --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17

5-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode (USB) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18

5-5 Error Detection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19

5-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 19

5-5-2 Processing after Error Detection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 19

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 ETECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

1

1. P.C.B. Functions

(1) MAIN P.C.B.

System-Control Section

• IC100 MODE MI-COM System control

• IC102 BACK UP MODE MI-COM reset

Camera/Card Section

• IC1101 SDRAM Memory for DIGIC DV (64M)

• IC1102 SDRAM Memory for DIGIC DV (64M)

• IC1103 DIGIC DV Camera digital signal processing, card image processing,

and USB interface

PM Section

• IC1810 CHARGE IC Charge control IC

• IC1811 OPE AMP Charge detection operational amplifier

• IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL Power PWM regulator controller

• IC3203 4.7V REGULATOR 4.7V regulator

Video Section

• IC2000 VRP2 Record playback head amplifier

• IC2300 FLASH Memory for FR MI-COM (16M)

• IC2301 VIC4 Digital VCR signal processing LSI, IEEE1394 interface,

FR MI-COM, and Analog video input/output signal processing

• IC2302 SDRAM Memory for VIC4 (64M)

MO Driver Section

• IC300 OPE AMP Operational amplifier for reel sensor

• IC301 MOTOR DRIVE Drum, capstan, and loading motor driver

(2) CAV P.C.B.

Camera Section

• IC1001 INVERTER Oscillation circuit inverter

• IC1002 TG/CDS/AGC/AD/V-DRIVER CCD, TG, CCD output signal sampling, AGC, A/D converter,

and CCD V-DRIVER

• IC1004 2.8V REGULATOR 2.8V Regulator

• IC1200 LENS DRIVE Zoom, focus motor driver, IRIS driver, and gyro output amp

CVF Section

• IC1501 EVF DRIVER EVF LCD (CVF) drive

Audio Section

• IC801 AUDIO INTERFACE Analog input/output signal processing, speaker amplifier

(3) CCD P.C.B.

• IC1070 CCD CCD image sensor

(4) LCD P.C.B.

• IC901 EEPROM EEPROM for LCD data

• IC902 LCD DRIVE LCD signal processing and drive

• IC4201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL Backlight drive

(5) CVF P.C.B.

Signal transfer from CAV P.C.B. to CVF-LCD, back-light LED turn-on

(6) JACK1 P.C.B.

AV JACK, IEEE1394 terminal, External microphone jack, Remote controller photosensor

• IC1601 P SENSOR GYRO Pitch-direction angular speed detection

• IC1602 Y SENSOR GYRO Yaw-direction angular speed detection


2

(7) JACK2 P.C.B.

USB terminal, S terminal

(8) KEY P.C.B.

Memory card slot, various keys


3

2. Power Supply Circuit

2-1 Startup of Power Supply

Fig. 1

3 13

5 7

76

77

51

66

6714

4

12

11

18

80

10

53

52

71

252

DET

RESET

SW

E3V

E3 DET

DC V DET

VCC

LITHIUM BATTERY

VTRPOWER SW

VTR ON

PM SECTION

DMC-IIICASSETTEIN SW

POWER SWEJ SW

FROMDC JACK

FROMBATTERYTERMINAL

CAMERAPOWER SW

NETPOWER SW

EJECT SW

CAS IN

RESET

CAM ON

VTR ON

DC J DET

LI DET

SERIALDATA

IC2301FR

MI-COM.(VIC4)

IC102BACK UP

IC100MODE

MI-COM.

CN2102

CN91

CN101CN102

CN101

DVDD2.7V

3VREG.

2.6VDET.

2.5VREG.

1223

28

+

−

+

JACK DET

−10

11

CN303

MAIN P.C.B. KEY P.C.B. EJECT P.C.B. OPERATIONKEY UNIT

3 12


4

• Backup Lithium Battery

LI3V power from the lithium battery is input to pin 3 of the IC102, and it is output from pin 12 as power to the MODE MI-COM.

Thus, the MODE MI-COM performs data backup and clock operation when main power supply is not connected.

When the voltage of the lithium battery decreases below 2.6 V (or when the lithium battery is not loaded), the IC102 outputs the “L”

signal from pin 2. Upon receipt of this signal at the time of power-on, the MODE MI-COM sends it to the FR MI-COM, which then

issue a lithium battery low-level warning indication.

• Main Power Supply

Main power (DC-JACK/BATTERY) is supplied to pin 13 of IC102. Through the internal regulator in IC102, the main power thus

supplied is converted to 3V power, which is output as E3V from pin 14 of IC102. Furthermore, through the internal switch, the

main power is converted to LI3V, which is output from pin 12 of IC102 as a power voltage for driving the MODE MI-COM.

When main power is supplied, the "H" signal is output from pin 4 of the IC101. Upon detection of this "H" signal, the MODE MI-

COM recognizes the main power source has been provided. Then, the COM MI-COM carries out initialization and sets up the

standby state. In this state, the MODE MI-COM performs detection of startup-related switches. When it detects that any one of the

startup-related switches has been turned on, the CAM ON (H) and VTR ON (H) signals are output from pins 52 or 53, respectively.

Upon output of the CAM ON (H) and VTR ON (H) signals, power to each circuit is turned on.

At power-on of each circuit, a voltage of 2.7/2.5 V is fed to pin 5/7 of the IC102. Then, through the internal switch, power to the

MODE MI-COM is output from pin 12 for saving current consumption.


5

2-2 Power Fuses

The power supply from the battery DC JACK is supplied to five fuses on the MAIN P.C.B., through which the following five power

voltage are delivered.

(1) CCD, 1.4V, 2.7V, 3V, DC/DC UNREG : FU3201

• CCD drive power source (-7V, +15V)

• 1.4V power source (MACS1.4V, DVDD1.4V, AVDD1.4V)

• 2.7V power source (M SDRAM2.7V, AA2.7V, SDRAM2.7V, AVDD2.7V, LCD2.7V, DIF2.7V)

• 3V power source (DVDD3V, CAM3V, HA3V)

• DC/DC CONVERTER power source

(2) LCD, 4.7V, 5V, VCR UNREG : FU3202

• LCD drive power source (8.5V)

• 4.7V power source (AA4.7V, HA4.7V)

• 5V power source (P5V, LCD5V)

• VCR UNREG

(3) MECHA UNREG : FU3203

• DRUM /CAPSTAN

(4) SHOE UNREG : FU3205

• Advanced Accessory shoe power source

(5) CHARGE UNREG : FU1810

• Charge circuit power source

Fig. 2

BATT. +BATT. TERNINAL

DC JACK DC + DC +

MAIN P.C.B.

JACK1 P.C.B.

FU3201

LCD, 4.7V, 5V,VTR UNREG

CCD, 1.4V, 2.7V, 3V,DC/DC CONVERTOR

FU3203

FU3205

MECHA UNREG

FU1810CHARGE UNREG

SHDE UNREG

FU3202CN3201

CN3202

CN3211


6

2-3 Power Supply Circuits

Figure 3 shows the power supply circuits.

The ON/OFF condition of each power supply voltage is controlled by the VTR ON / CAM ON signals output from the MODE MI-COM.

Fig. 3

IC3201DC/DC

CONVERTERCONTROL

DVDD 2.7V

AA 2.7V

M SDRAM 2.7V

LCD 2.7V

LCD 8.5VREG.

REG.

64

5

PWM

28

30

53

43

PWM

VTR ON

CAM ON

SDRAM 2.7V

DIF 2.7V

AVDD 2.7V

DVDD 3V

CAM 3V

HA 3V

Q3203

REG.56

40

PWMQ3205

MAIN P.C.B.

31

60

21

Q3207REG.

P 5V

HA 4.7V

LPF LCD 5V

REG.

LPF

LPF

LPF

LPF

LPF MACS 1.4V

LPF

PWM

CH-5

UNREG

DRUM VM

AA 4.7V57

37

Q3206REG.PWM

CH-4

UNREG

CCD 15V

CCD -7V62

11

REG.PWM

CH-7

UNREG

DVDD 1.4V

AVDD 1.4V

50

46

Q3204

IC3203

REG.PWM

CH-1

CH-8

CH-2

UNREG

CAP VM61

15

Q3208

Q3201

Q3202L3211

REG.PWM

CH-6

UNREG

UNREG

CH-3

UNREG


7

3. Built-in Charger Circuit

3-1 Outline

The main circuit elements and their functions are as follows.

(1) MODE MI-COM

• Control of IC1810

• Detection and display of charging progress

• Error discrimination and display

• Battery type discrimination and DC jack input detection

(2) IC1810 (CHARGE CONTROL)

• Charging voltage and charging current control

Fig. 4

IC1810MB3833ACHARGE

CONTROL

IC1811CHARGEI DETECT

OSC

OUTPUTDRIVE

POWERSAVE

1312 7 8

VCC

14 15 2 3

41

3

INIT CHARGE 1

CHARGE

DC +

DC J SW

MAIN P.C.B.PM SECTIONUNREG

CN3202BATT.

TERNINAL

CN1801DC IN OFF

MAIN P.C.B.

JACK1 P.C.B.

MAIN P.C.B.MODE MI-COM

MAIN P.C.B.MODE MI-COM

DETECT

+

−

DC JACKCN3212

CN51

CN3211 CN3201

CN2101

BATT −BATT INFO AD

BATT +

THERMISTOR

BATTERY

DC J SW

DC V DET

BATT INFO

DC J DET

A/D I

A/D V

DC +

Q1812

Q1813

FU1810Q1815

Q1814

−

+

−

+

T

4,5

3

1,2

2

23

1

4


8

3-2 Operation at Charging

3-2-1 Conditions to Start Charging

When the following conditions are satisfied, the MODE MI-COM (IC100) controls the IC 1810 starts charging.

If the conditions (4) and (5) are not satisfied, a charge error is indicated.

Conditions Detection Source of detection

1 Main unit power is turned OFF MODE MI-COM -

DC jack is connected. MODE MI-COM pin 71 DC JACK

DC JACK DET

Power supplied from DC jack MODE MI-COM pin 80 DC IN

DC V DET

UNREG voltage is 8.4 ±0.3 V. MODE MI-COM pin 87 VTR UNREG.

BATT.AD

Battery temperature is within the range of MODE MI-COM pin 88 Battery T terminal

-6.8°C to 49.3°C. BATT.INFO

2

3

4

5


9

3-2-2 Progress of Charging

The IC1810 starts a trickle charge under control of the MODE MI-COM (IC100). The trickle charge continues until the battery voltage

reaches 6.5V. At the point in time when 6.5V is reached, the IC1810 starts a 0.66A quick charge. Then, the charge current decreases

gradually with the progress of charging (because of an increase in impedance of the battery). When the charge current becomes 80 mA

or less, the end-of-charging indication is provided. Thereafter, supplementary charging is performed for 24 minutes at maximum until

the charge current becomes 40 mA or less.

Fig. 5

When the battery voltagereaches 5.2 V, the trickletimer (2) is started.

0.56A

80mA

40mA

135min.max

5min.max

24min.max204min.max144min.max

330min.max

Cha

rgin

g cu

rren

t LED flashes once LED flashes twice LED lights up steadily

Quick charge 0.66A

When battery voltage reaches 6.5V, quick charge starts.

Trickle100mA

An error is indicated if the battery voltage becomes 5.7V or lower during quickcharging or constant-voltage charging. An error is indicated if the battery temperature is not within the range of−10 C to 52.5 C.

Quick charge timer2-flashtimer Supplementary charge timer

Elapsed time

Timeout error

Full charge indication at timeout

Full charge indication at timeout

Total timer

Trickle1 timer

Trickle2 timer

Timeout error

Timeout error


10

4. Signal Processing Circuit

4-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit

Figure 6 shows the entire block diagram of the signal processing circuit and the flow of video and audio signals.

Fig. 6

LENS

CCD P.C.B.

KEYP.C.B.

JACK2 P.C.B.

JACK1 P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B.

LCD P.C.B.

CAV P.C.B.

MEMORYCARD

IC1103DIGIC DV

IC801AIF4

LCD

CVFLCD

IC1001CCD

IC2302SDRAM

IC903LCD

DRIVE

IC501EVF DRIVE

IC2000VRP2

IC1101/IC1102SDRAM

IC2301VIC4

IC1002TG/CDS/AGC/AD

/V-DRIVER

USB

DIF

FRMICOM

MIN AVJACK

USBTERMINAL

DVTERMINAL

MIC

SPEAKER

REC/PBHEAD


11

4-2 Camera/Card Signal Processing

4-2-1 Camera Motion Picture Recording

4-2-2 Card Still Picture Recording

Fig. 7

JPEGJPEG

Audio

SynthesisCOMP

Deformation, DrawingREND

Camera signal processing

GRABCARD IF

proc resize nr VIC4IC2301

FRMI-COM

SDRAM IF

AIFIC801

IC1103DIGIC DV

CDS/AGC/AD/TG/

V-DRIVERIC1002

CCDIC1070

36MHz 12bit36MHz

64 Mbit SDRAMIC1102

32 bit

64 Mbit SDRAMIC1101

32 bit

Fig. 8

JPEG

Audio

SDRAM IF

CARD IF

proc resize nr

VIC4IC2301

SDCARD

DMAFR

MI-COM

RAW YCC 1 YCC 2

AIFIC801

USB


GRAB

SynthesisCOMP


IC1103DIGIC DV

64 Mbit SDRAMIC1102

32 bit

64 Mbit SDRAMIC1101

32 bit

CDS/AGC/AD/TG/

V-DRIVERIC1002

CCDIC1070

36MHz 12bit36MHz


12

4-2-3 Card Motion Picture Recording

<CCD> IC1001

• 1/4.5 inches interlaced CCD

• Complementary color filter

• Total number of pixels Approx. 1,330,000

Effective number of pixels Tape : Approx. 860,000 / Card : Approx. 1,230,000

<CDS/AGC/AD/TG/V-DRIVER> IC1002

A signal read out of the CCD is extracted. Then, after the extracted signal is subjected to AGC processing and A/D conversion, it

is output as a digital signal.

<DIGIC DV> IC1103

This circuit carries out various camera signal processing operations (EIS, AWB, etc.), and digital effect processing. It also performs

multimedia-application signal processing mainly for still image recording.

• Feature engine

• High-speed card interface

• JPEG

• Audio data compression (ADPCM)

• USB function

<SDRAM> IC1102, IC1101

Field memory for camera signal processing and digital effect processing

Image data memory for Memory card write/read operation

Fig. 9

JPEG

Audio

CARD IF

proc nr

SDCARD

DMA

YCC 1 YCC 2

AIFIC801

resize

SDRAM IF


GRAB

SynthesisCOMP


VIC4IC2301

FRMI-COM

IC1103DIGIC DV

64 Mbit SDRAMIC1102

32 bit

64 Mbit SDRAMIC1101

32 bit

CDS/AGC/AD/TG/

V-DRIVERIC1002

CCDIC1001

36MHz 12bit36MHz


13

4-3 Recorder Signal Processing

< VIC4 >IC2301

• The VIC, MI-COM, DIF INTERFACE and VIDEO INTERFACE circuits are integrated on a single semiconductor chip.

• A/B DATA : Input in camera mode. B DATA is output and A DATA is input at playback. (DIGIC DV digital effect circuit is

used at playback.)

The video data and signals input to VIC4 are subjected to digital VCR format signal processing. Audio data,

subcode data and ITI data are also created at VIC4, and these signals are output to VRP2 as 41.85 Mbps data of

DV format.

• DIF : After conversion to digital data conforming to IEEE1394 standard, the data is output at DV terminal. At digital

input, the data enters VIC4 signal processing circuit via the opposite route.

< VRP2 >IC2000

Recording data of 41.85 Mbps output from VIC4 is amplified at VRP2, and is recorded on magnetic tape while undergoing head

switching of CH-1, CH-2 with a switching pulse. At playback, the head output signal is amplified and sent to VIC4.

Fig. 10

AV JACKS TERMINAL

CVFLCD

LCD

IC1103DIGIC

DV

VIDEOINTERFACE

A DATA

B DATA

R,G,B

D/A75ΩDRIVE

A/D

IC2302SDRAM

REC/PBPROCESS

ECCCOMPRESSION/DEMOD.

BUS

IC2301VIC4

VIC BLOCK DIF BLOCK

MI-COM. BLOCK

SDRAMINTERFACE

DIFINTERFACE

FR MI-COM.Cache

1K ByteCO-

processer

AUDIO INTERFACE

IC2000VRP2

DV TERMINAL

AVJACK

IC801AIF4

VIDEOHEAD


14

4-4 Audio Signal Flow

< AIF >IC801

Out ALC (Auto Level Control), fading, and amplification of various output signals. For the beep tone issued at ejection, etc., the

signal from the FR MI-COM is generated in the circuit and changed over in the AIF.

The microphone amplifier, HPF, ALC, A/D, D/A, and digital I/F, SPEAKER DRIVER with ALC circuits are contained in this IC.

It is also used for changeover between ordinary voice sound and beep sound.

< VIC4 >

The following processing operations are carried out for reducing noise from the DMC mechanism.

• Noise cancellation based on correlation of V-cycle noise components.

• Noise component reduction by means of trapping.

< Automatic wind noise cutting>

For efficient reduction of wind noise, the cutoff frequency of the wind noise cutting HPF circuit is regulated according to the

current level of wind noise.

Fig. 11

SPEAKERDRIVER

FRMI-COM.

IC801AIF4

IC1103DIGIC DV

IC2301VIC4

IC2000VRP2

+

−

L

L

R

L

R

RMIC

HEADPHONE

AVJACK

B EEP

Serial

SPEAKER

MEM IF CARD IF

SDRAM CARD

REC/PB

HEAD

Fig. 12

AIF4 VIC4DIGICDV

(L)

(R)

L + R

L − R

MICIN

HPF

HPF HPF

WINDDETECT(L − R)

FRMI-COM.

150Hz 600Hz 40Hz 3kHz


15

5. System Control, Servo

5-1 Outline of System Control, Servo

Figure 13 shows the overall configuration of the system control & servo circuit, plus the flow of data. System control is performed

by the FR MI-COM (IC2301) and MODE MI-COM (IC100) on MAIN P.C.B.

Fig. 13

DMC III

MAIN P.C.B.

LCD P.C.B.

JACK1 P.C.B.

JACK2 P.C.B.

OPERATIONKEY UNIT

ZOOMPHOTO UNIT

CAV P.C.B. KEY P.C.B.

HEAD

REMOTE CONTROLSIGNAL RECEIVER

M

FG/PG

DRUM

CAPSTAN

LOADING

FG

M

M

IC901EEPROM

ZOOM SW

START/STOPSW

PHOTO SW

SELECT SW

R-KEY

EJECT SW

POWER SW

IC903LCD

DRIVER

IC3201DC/DC

CONVERTER

FRMI-COM

IC1103DIGIC

DV

VIC

IC100MODE

MI-COM

IC801AIF4

IC1501EVF

DRIVER

IC1200LENS

DRIVER

IC2000VRP2

IC2300FLASH

MEMORYCARD

IC1002CDSAGC

A/D TGV-DRIVER

LENS

IC301MOTORDRIVER

IC2301VIC4

CAPSTAN

DRIVER

DRUM

DRIVER

MODE SWC.DOWN SW

BOT/EOTSENS.DEW

REEL FG

MIC

LOADING

DRIVER

D-VS

D-VM

C-VM

C-ERR

D-ERR

C-VS

DFG/PG

CFG

IRISDRIVE

MOTORDRIVE


16

5-2 Major Functions of Each MI-COM

(1) FR MI-COM (IC2301 : VIC4)

The FR MI-COM, as the nucleus of the system, carries out control of mode transition plus mechanism control through communi-

cation with MODE MI-COM. It also detects of various sensors and switches (DMCIII). Following are the major functions.

• VIC (Video) control / AIF4 (Audio Interface) controls

• Control in accordance with IEEE1394

• USB interface control

• AUDIO control

• DMC III mechanism control

• DIGIC DV control

• Card control

• CCD drive control

• AE, AF, AWB control

• EIS (Electric Image Stabilizer) control

• OSD (On Screen Display) bitmap control

• PRINTER control

* The FR MI-COM in this machine does not have a dedicated EEPROM. Since a flash ROM is used for the FR

MI-COM as a substitute for the EEPROM, it is required to update the flash ROM after adjustment and data

modification regarding the FR MI-COM.

(2) MODE MI-COM (IC100)

The MODE MI-COM is mainly in charge of the power-on sequence and charging control. Following are the major functions.

• Key input

• LCD / EVF control

• Remote control input

• Power ON/OFF control

• Built-in charge circuit control

• MIC (Memory In Cassette) control

* The MODE MI-COM in this machine does not have a dedicated EEPROM. Since a flash ROM is used for the

FR MI-COM as a substitute for the EEPROM, it is required to update the flash ROM after adjustment and data

modification regarding the FR MI-COM.


17

5-3 Servo Control

Servo control is carried out by the VIC4 (VIC and FR MI-COM). The FR MI-COM is used for servo control of motor ON/OFF and

rotational direction, and the VIC is used to output rotational speed and phase control signals. More specifically in terms of signal

flow, the VIC detects the FG/PG and PB-RF signals from the motor, and sends the detected signal information to the FR MI-COM.

Then, the FR MI-COM generates an error signal to be output to the VIC. Thereafter, the VIC outputs an error signal (PWM), which

is driven on the MAIN P.C.B. for sending a control voltage to the motor driver IC.

Fig. 14

VIC4

S REEL Hall SENSOR

LOADING MOTOR

DRUM MOTOR

CAPSTAN MOTOR

T REEL Hall SENSOR

LOAD ON/UNLOAD FR

DERR

LOAD+/LOAD-DMC III

U/V/W

Ucoil/Vcoil/Wcoil

CFG2C

AP

VS

CA

P V

M

DR

UM

VS

DR

UM

VM

CERR

DA CFG

DA S REEL

DA T REEL

IC301MO DRIVE

DC/DCCONVERTER


18

5-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode (USB)

In the card camera mode, an image signal produced in the camera section is sent to the memory card via the DIGIC DV. In the

personal computer connection mode, the USB terminal and the memory card are connected through the USB controller.

The FR MI-COM performs control of changeover between the card camera mode and the personal computer connection mode.

Fig. 15

Signal flow of (in)Card camera mode

Signal flow of (in)Personal computer connection mode

IC1101SDRAM

IC1103DIGIC DV

MEMORYCARD

USBTERMINAL

Still PictureSignal

Processing

FRMI-COM

USBCONTROLER

IC1001CCD

IC1002TG/CDSAGC/AD

/V-DRIVER


19

5-5 Error Detection

If an abnormality has been occurred in any rotation drive system (drum, capstan, reel, loading), a relevant mode enters. The LCD

indicates “PLEASE UNLOAD THE CASSETTE” and blinks “EJECT”.

5-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions

The following table gives error detecting conditions.

5-5-2 Processing after Error Detection

The following table gives processing after error detection.

• Pop up : Error display→error eject → pop up →error clear

• Error stop : Error display→STOP position (not cleared unless EJECTED)

Kind Condition Detection

Drum error Error detecting mode Starting / steady D-FG

FG frequency when steady 900Hz

Error detecting level Starting: Beyond 80-150%.

Steady : 30% max.

Error detecting time Starting : 5sec.

Steady : 0.5sec.

Capstan error Error detecting mode Starting / steady C-FG

FG frequency when steady 1347Hz

Error detecting level Starting : 80% max.

Steady : 60Hz max.

Error detecting time Starting : 2sec.

Steady : 2sec.

Reel error Error detecting mode Starting / Normal / UNLOAD T, S-REEL FG

Error detection Normally : The C-FG count per reel FG cycle is C-FG

Starting : More than 3296

Steady : More than 2256

UNLOAD : Reel FG cycle is 1 sec or more

(Take-up reel only for both)

Loading error Error detecting mode Mode transfer Mode SW

Error detection Mode transfer time

STANDBY-STOP : 6sec

STANDBY-POPUP : 3sec

STOP-PLAY : 3sec

Cassette in LoadingDuring

unloadingLoading

completedDuring tape

runningDuring mode

transfer

Drum error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop

Capstan error Pop up ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop

Reel error ------- ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop

Loading error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop ------- Error stop

DISASSEMBLING

CONTENTS

1. Disassembling and Reassembling

Notes

List of Supplies

1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3

1-2 Separation of Accessory Shoe and LI Battery Holder ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4

1-3 Separation of Top Cover Ass’y --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5

1-4 Separation of R-LCD Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6

1-5 Separation of Rear Cover Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7

1-6 Separation of Front Cover Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

1-7 Separation of Left Cover Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9

1-8 Separation of Shields ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10

1-9 Separation of CVF Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12

1-10 Separation of JACK 2 P.C.B. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13

1-11 Separation of Camera Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14

1-12 Separation of CAV P.C.B. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15

1-13 Separation of MAIN P.C.B. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16

1-14 Separation of Recorder Holder ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18

1-15 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit - 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19



1-18 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 24



1-21 Disassembly of R-LCD Unit - 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30



1-24 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33

1-25 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34

1-26 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35

1-27 Disassembly of LCD Hinge Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37

1-28 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38

1-29 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39

1-30 Disassembly of CVF Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40





1-35 Disassembly of Camera Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 46

1-36 Disassembly of Lens Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47

1-37 List of Screws Used ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 48

1-38 List of Disassembly Photos ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 EDISASSEMBLING

1

1. Disassembling and Reassembling - (1)

Notes

(1) When replacing the flat cable with a new one, allow it to remain folded the same as the original part.

(2) The flat cable has a contact orientation to be engaged with the connector. Refer to the instructions in the disassembly procedure

diagram and interconnection diagram for boards.

(3) To secure screws, apply the Three Bond 1401B (CY9-8011-000)

(4) If any part to be replaced has UL tape attached on it, be sure to reattach UL tape at the same position in reassembling.

(5) Use the new type connector (MAIN P.C.B. CN102) as illustrated.

FPCFPC

Lock Unlock

Metalcontact

Metalcontact

(6) For replacing the fuse mounted on the MAIN P.C.B., it is required to remove the CVF unit.

• Lateral engaging connector

(The instructions are given in the disassembly proce-

dure diagram and board interconnection diagram.)

: Contacts are positioned downward. (board side)

∗ : Contacts are positioned upward.

Metal contact (Pins' face up)

Metal contact (Pins' face down)

:

:

• Lengthwise engaging connector

( The instructions are given in the disassembly proce-

dure diagram and board interconnection diagram.)

Indicated by → Arrowheads indicate the contacts, and the

shafts indicate the noncontacts.

Metal contact

Metal contact


2

1. Disassembling and Reassembling - (2)

List of Supplies

Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks

Grease FLOIL C-1Z DY9-3039-000 Lubrication DMC III

Grease FLOIL 948P DY9-3051-000 Lubrication DMC III

Hanal FL-778 DY9-3026-010 Lubrication Cover

Hanal KS-39M DY9-3053-000 Lubrication Cover

Hanal KS-50M DY9-3047-000 Lubrication Cover, DMC III

EM-30L DY9-3031-000 Lubrication Cover

Dia Bond No. 1663G CY9-8129-000 Adhesive LCD

Sponge (W H × T : 300mm 200mm 6mm) DY9-4001-000 General-purpose vibration isolating

/sound absorbing material

Adhesive Tape, No.354E DY9-3032-000 General-purpose adhesive tape

(W L × T : 9mm × 50m × 0.15mm, UL type)

Adhesive Tape, No. 501F DY9-3034-000 General-purpose

(W × L × T : 10mm × 50m × 0.16mm, UL type) double-side-coated adhesive tape

Sheet, Shield (W × H : 250mm × 250mm) DY9-3036-000 General-purpose shield material


3

1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart

(1) Find the replacement part on the chart, and disassemble it following the instruction on chart.

(2) Reassembling can be made by reversing the disassembling procedures.

START : MAIN FLOW

: SUB FLOW

: MAIN UNIT

1-22 KEY P.C.B.

1-29 Power Switch Ass'y

1-29 Rear Cover

1-4 R-LCD Unit

1-6 Front Cover Unit

1-7 Left Cover Unit

1-15 Jack1 P.C.B.

1-17 Front Cover Ass'y

1-16 Mic Ass'y

1-18 Zoom Photo Key Ass'y

1-19 Speaker

1-10 Jack2 P.C.B.

1-20 Cassette Arm Ass'y

1-5 Rear Cover Unit

1-8 Camera Recorder CVF Unit

1-23 LCD Unit

1-11 Recorder Unit

1-9 CVF Unit

1-11 Camera Unit

1-23 Right Cover Unit

1-25 LCD Hinge Unit

1-24 Right Cover Ass'y

1-26 Backlight Ass'y

1-26 LCD P.C.B.

1-26 LCD Ass'y

1-35 CCD Ass'y

1-35 Lens Ass'y

1-35 CCD P.C.B.

1-12 CAV P.C.B.

1-13 Main P.C.B.

1-14 DMC lll

1-33 CVF Ass'y

1-33 CVF P.C.B.

END


4

1-2 Separation of Accessory Shoe and LI Battery Holder

(1) Remove four screws (a × 4), and detach the Accessory Shoe.

(2) Open the LCD Unit, and detach the LI Battery Holder.

<Note on Reassembling>

(1) Tighten the four screws (a × 4) on the Accessory Shoe in a diagonal sequence.

Fig. 1

5mm

a

MetalM1.7

Flat Head Screw

Accessory Shoe

ACC Cover

LCD Unit

LI Battery Holder

(1)

(2)

(2)

(1) - a


5

1-3 Separation of Top Cover Ass’y

(1) Open the Cassette Cover, and remove one screw (b × 1).

(2) Disengage claws A and B. While being free from part E of the Shoe Connector, pull up the claw A and claw B sides to demount the

Top Cover Ass’y.


(1) When remounting the Top Cover Ass’y, engage claws B and C first. Then, while being free from the part E of the Shoe Connector,

insert the claw A and part D sides for engagement.

Fig. 2

5mm

MetalM1.7

b

Top Cover Ass'y

Cassette Cover

Claw A

Part D

Part E

Claw B

Claw C

(1) - b

(2)

(1)


6

1-4 Separation of R-LCD Unit

(1) Remove eleven screws (c × 1, d × 5, e × 2, f × 2, g × 1), disconnect the CN101, and detach the R-LCD Unit.

Fig. 3

3mmMetalM1.7

ge fd4mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

4mm

MetalM1.7

6mm

MetalM1.7

c

R-LCD Unit

(1) - cCN101(1)

(1)

(1) - e

(1) - d

(1) - d

(1) - d

(1) - d

(1) - d

(1) - e

(1) - f

(1) - f

(1) - f

(1) - f(1) - g


7

1-5 Separation of Rear Cover Unit

(1) Disengage the Grip Belt from the Grip Hook.

(2) Open the Cassette Cover, and remove four screws (d × 1, h × 3).

(3) Disconnect the CN101 and CN3202, and detach the Rear Cover Unit.

Fig. 4

3mmMetalM1.7

d3.5mm

MetalM1.7

h

Cassette Cover

Rear Cover Unit

Grip Belt

Grip Hook

CN101

CN3202 (3)

(3)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(2) - d

(2) - h

(2) - h

(2) - h


8

1-6 Separation of Front Cover Unit

(1) Open the Jack1 Cover and Jack2 Cover, and remove six screws (h × 4, i × 1, j × 1).

(2) Disconnect the CN3211, CN42, and CN51. Then, while being free from the Lens Shield, detach the Front Cover Unit.

(Refer to 1-8 : Separation of Shields.)

Fig. 5

3.5mmMetalM1.7

h

5.5mm

MetalM1.7

i

MetalM1.7

2mm

j

Jack1 Cover

Jack2 Cover

(2)

(2)

(2) (2)

(1)

(1)

CN51

CN3211

CN42

(1) - h

(1) - h

Lens Shield

(1) - h

(1) - h

(1) - h

(1) - i

(1) - i

(1) - j


9

1-7 Separation of Left Cover Unit

(1) Remove four screws (k × 4).

(2) Open the Cassette Cover, disconnect the CN100, and then detach the Left Cover Unit.


(1) In reassembling the Left Cover Unit, connect the CN100 first. Then, mount the Left Cover Unit while taking sufficient care not to

damage the flexible cable.

Fig. 6

k2.5mm

MetalM1.7

(2)

(2)

Left Cover UnitCassette Cover

CN100

(2)

(1) - k

(1) - k

(1) - k

(1) - k

(1) - k


10

1-8 Separation of Shields

(1) Remove three screws (j × 2, k × 1), and then detach the Lens Shield, Lens Shield B, and FPC Shield Unit.

Fig. 7

k2.5mm

MetalM1.7

MetalM1.7

2mm

j

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

Part A

Part C

Lens Shield

Part B

Part D

Part E

Part F

FPC Shield Unit

A

A

(1) - k

(1) - j

(1) - j

Lens Shield B


11


(1) Reassemble the Lens Shield, Lens Shield B, and FPC Shield Unit as illustrated below.

(Refer to 1-6 : Separation of Front Cover Unit.)

(2) Attach the FPC Shield above the CAV-JACK1 FPC (8 pins) to provide a distance as large as possible. With the MAIN-KEY FPC

folded, it shall not come into direct contact with the CAV-JACK1 FPC.

Fig. 8

Note on Reassembling (1)


Front Cover

Lug terminal mountingangle : Within 45.0

A Part of Lens Shield

Refer to 1-6:Separation of Front Cover Unit.

C Part of FPC Shield

B Part of Lens Shield

D Part of Lens Shield B

F Part of CVF Unit

E Part of Lens Shield B

MAIN-KEY FPCCAV-JACK1 FPC FPC Sheld Unit


12

1-9 Separation of CVF Unit

(1) Detach the Shoe Connector Ass’y. (MVX250i E only)

(2) Disconnect the CN891, and detach the ACS-MAIN FPC. (MVX250i E only)

(3) Remove three screws (k × 2, h × 1), and then detach the Shoe Base and GND Plate.

(4) Turn up the CVF Unit, remove one screw (h × 1), disconnect the CN1501, and demount the CVF Unit.


(1) Before using a service part of GND Plate, attach the UL Tape to the position indicated in the figure below.

(2) Attach the GND plate to the Shoe Base as illustrated below.

k2.5mm

MetalM1.7

3.5mmMetalM1.7

h



(2)

(3)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(4)

CVF Unit

Shoe Base

GND Plate

ACS-MAIN FPC

CN891CN1501

MVX250i E only

(4) - h

GND PlateShoe Base

(3) - h(3) - k

MVX250i E onlyGND Plate

A surplus part of the ULTape shall be foldedonto the back side.

Attach the UL tape before reassembling.

Attachmentreference

UL Tape (9 × 25)

(1) Shoe Connector Ass'y(3) - k

Fig. 9


13

1-10 Separation of JACK 2 P.C.B.

(1) Detach the Cushion RC1 and RC2.

(2) Remove two screws (k × 2), disconnect the CN91, and detach the JACK2 P.C.B.

(3) Detach the CAV-JACK1 FPC and MAIN-JACK1 FPC from the CN701 and CN2101.


(1) Before mounting the JACK2 P.C.B., run the MAIN-JACK1 FPC, CAV-JACK1 FPC, and MAIN-JACK1 Cable through groove A.

(2) Attach the Cushion RC1 and RC2 to the position indicated in the figure below.

Fig. 10

k2.5mm

MetalM1.7

Note on Reassembling (1),(2)

JACK2 P.C.B.

CAV-JACK1 FPC

CAV-JACK1 FPC

MAIN-JACK1 FPC

MAIN-JACK1 FPC

MAIN-JACK1 Cable

(2)(3)

(3)CN91

(2)

CN701

CN2101

Groove A

(1)

(1)

Align to thehole center.

Align to a point 1.5 mm abovethe edge of the P.C.B.

Align to the outline of the DV Connector.

(2) - k

(2) - k

Cushion RC1

Cushion RC2

Cushion RC1

Cushion RC2

1.5mm

JACK2 P.C.B.


14

1-11 Separation of Camera Unit

(1) Remove two screws (j × 1, l × 1), and then detach the Sub Holder and Insulation Rubber.

(2) Remove two screws (l × 2), detach the UL Tape, and disconnect the CN1000 and CN1200. Then, detach the Camera Unit, Ferrite

Core, and Insulation Rubber.


(1) With the UL Tape, secure the Ferrite Core to the position indicated in the figure below so that it will not be dislocated.

<Instruction for Supply>

Entire surface of Insulation Rubber : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)

Fig. 11

l4.5mm

MetalM1.7

Steped Screw

MetalM1.7

2mm

j

Instruction for Supply Note on Reassembling (1)

Sub Holder

Camera Unit

UL Tape (9 × 30)

UL Tape (9 × 30)

Ferrite Core

Ferrite Core

Insulation Rubber

Insulation Rubber

Insulation Rubber

Recorder Unit

(2)(2)

(2)

(2)CN1200

CN1000

Insulation Rubber

Hanal KS-39M

Attachment reference

Fold theUL tape.

Rear View

(2) - l

(2) - l

(1) - l

(1) - j


15

1-12 Separation of CAV P.C.B.

(1) Disconnect the CN1001 and CN1100 (B to B), and then detach the CAV P.C.B.

(2) Disconnect the CN3201, remove the UL Tape, and detach the MAIN-JACK1 Cable.

(3) Disconnect the CN102 and CN2102, and then detach the MAIN-KEY FPC and MAIN-JACK2 FPC.

Note : Use the CN102 (MAIN P.C.B.) as illustrated below.

(4) Remove the UL Tape from the MAIN-KEY FPC, and detach the Ferrite Core.


(1) With the UL Tape, secure the Ferrite Core to the position indicated in the figure below so that it will not be dislocated.

(2) Attach the MAIN-JACK1 Cable as illustrated below, and then secure it with the UL Tape.

Fig. 12

Note

Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2)

CAV P.C.B.

MAIN - JACK1 Cable

MAIN - JACK2 FPC

MAIN - KEY FPC

MAIN-KEY FPC

UL Tape (13 × 21)

UL Tape (13 × 21)

Ferrite Core

Ferrite Core

(1)

(2)

(2)

(4)(3)

(3)

(4)

CN3201

CN1001(B to B)

CN1100(B to B)

CN2102

CN102

UL Tape (9 × 36)

Run the cable through a clearance between the ICs and the connectors so that it is not pinched between them.

FPCFPC

Locked Unlocked

CN100

CN1100

CN302

CN3201

CN3202

CN101

IC301

IC300

IC100

CN303

UL Tape(9 × 36)

ContactContact


16

1-13 Separation of MAIN P.C.B.

(1) Remove three screws (k × 3), UL Tape, and disconnect the CN300, CN301, CN302, and CN2000. Then, detach the MAIN P.C.B.

(2) Detach the HA Shield, Shielding Rubber, PM1 Shield and PM2 Shield, from the MAIN P.C.B.

(3) Detach the Core Cushion

Fig. 13

k2.5mm

MetalM1.7

(2)

(2)

(2)(2)

(3)(1)

(1)

PM2 Shield

HA Shield

PM1 Shield

MAIN P.C.B.

CN2000

CN303

CN302

CN300

CN301

A

B

AB

CoreCushion

(1) - k

(1) - k

(1) - k ShieldingRubber

UL Tape (9 × 20)


17


(1) Attach the Core Cushion to the position indicated in the figure below.

(2) Attach the Shielding Rubber to the PM Shield as illustrated below.

(3) Secure the flexible cable by attaching the UL Tape to the position indicated in the figure below.

Fig. 14




RecorderHolder

Shielding RubberPM1 Shield

PM1 Shield

PM2 Shield

Shielding Rubber

PM Shield

MAIN P.C.B.

MAIN P.C.B.

The UL tape shall not protrude fromthe outline of the Motor.

It is not allowed to attachthe Shielding Rubber inan overlaying form.

Take care not to let the Shielding Rubberbe sandwiched between the MAIN P.C.B.and the MAIN Holder.

When attaching the Shielding Rubber, push itto the part A of the Recorder Holder so thatthe MAIN P.C.B. will not be unseated.

UL Tape (9 × 20)

Motor

Core Cushion

MAIN P.C.B.

MAIN P.C.B.

Part A

Top endof IC

End of P.C.B.




18

1-14 Separation of Recorder Holder

(1) Remove three screws (m × 3), and detach the Spring, Recorder Holder, and Insulation Rubber.


Entire surface of Insulation Rubber : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)

Fig. 15

3.4mm

MetalM1.4

Steped Screw

m

Instruction for Supply

Hanal KS-39M

Insulation Rubber

DMC III

(1)

Recorder Holder

Insulation Rubber

Insulation Rubber

Insulation Rubber

Spring(1) - m

(1) - m

(1) - m


19

1-15 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit - 1

(1) Detach the Jack2 Cover.

(2) Disconnect the CN43, and remove three screws (e × 1, f × 1, h × 1). Then, detach the Cushion, GND Plate, LED Window, and

JACK1 P.C.B.

(3) Slide the Jack2 Panel in the arrow direction to disengage the dowel A, and detach the Jack2 Panel.

e f4mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

3.5mmMetalM1.7

h

Jack2 Cover

Jack2 Panel

(3)

Dowel A

JACK1 P.C.B.

LED Window

GND Plate

Cushion

(2)

(2)

(1) CN43

(2) - h

(2)

(2) - e

(2) - f

Fig. 16


20


(1) Slide the Jack2 Panel in the arrow direction to engage the dowel A with the claw B so that the Jack2 Plate is attached to the Jack2

Cover securely.

(2) Attach the GND Plate and LED Window as illustrated below.

(3) Attach the Cushion as illustrated below.



Insert part C of theGND Plate underthe LED Window.

Part C

Dowel A

Claw B

1. Insert the top end part A of the Cushion in the arrow direction, and pull it outward as shown in the figure.

Peel-off sheet side

AA LED Window

LED Window

Cylinder

Cushion

Cushion

Cushion

Cushion

E

C

C

DD

F

2. Insert the part B of the Cushion into a gap between the LED Window Cylinder and the CN51, and remove the peel-off sheet from the Cushion.

CN51

B

B

B

B

LED Window

3. Align the end of the cutout part of the F Side Cover with the edge part C of the Cushion, align the end face D with the wall face of the F Side Cover, and attach the Cushion by turning the part B.

4. Attach the Cushion by folding the parts E and F.

E

LED Window

F

GND Plate

Jack2 Panel

Jack2 Cover

LED Window

Fig. 17


21


(1) Detach the Front Cushion

(2) Remove three screws (f × 3), and detach the MIC Plate, F Base Plate, MIC Rubber, MIC Ass’y, MIC Shield, and MIC Sheet.

(3) Detach the Cushion. (MVX250i E only)

Fig. 18

f5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

F Base Plate

MIC Plate

MIC Rubber

MIC Ass'y

MIC Shield

MIC Sheet

(2)

(1)

(2) - f

(2) - f

Front Cushion

Cushion(3)

MVX250i Eonly


22


(1) Attach the Cushion to the position indicated in the figure below. (MVX250i E only)

(2) Carry out wiring for the MIC Ass’y Cable as illustrated below.

(3) Attach the Front Cushion to the position indicated in the figure below.

Fig. 19




Cushion

Align the LED window with the dentpart of the Cushion. (Attach the Cushion so that it will notprotrude onto the LED window.)

Arrange the four cable wires in parallel so that they are not crossed over each other.

Red / Black White / Black

Arrange the four cablewires in parallel, andrun them betweenthe dowels.

L sideWhite / Black

R sideRed / Black

MVX250i Eonly

Attachmentreferencefor FrontCushion

Align the slit and the rib.

The top part of the F Cover shall be turned ontothe cylindrical wall.


23


(1) Remove three screws (f × 3), and detach the Lens Ring Ass’y, MEGA PIXEL Plate, and Lens Rubber.

(2) Using tweezers or the like, push the claw A to remove the Jack1 Cover.

(3) Detach the Front Panel.

Note : When detaching the Front Panel, push part B from the back side.


(1) When attaching the Front Panel, engage the claws C, D, E, F in that order.

(2) Attach the MEGA PIXEL Plate to the Lens Ring Ass’y, and insert the Lens Rubber in the orientation indicated in the figure below

for attachment to the Front Cover Ass’y.

f

5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

Note



Jack1 CoverJack1 Cover

Front Panel

Lens Ring Ass'y

Lens Ring Ass'y

Front Cover Ass'y

Lens Rubber

Lens Rubber

MEGA PIXEL Plate

MEGA PIXEL Plate

Front Cover Ass'y

(2)

(3)

Claw A

Claw A

Part B

Push

Push

(1)

(1)

(1)

Claw D

Claw F

Claw E

Claw C

(1) - f

(1) - f

Fig. 20


24

1-18 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit - 1

(1) Remove five screws (d × 4, t × 1).

(2) Disengage two claws A and two dowels B of the Zoom Photo Key Ass’y. Then, with the Zoom Photo Key Ass’y unseated, detach

the Open Knob.

(3) Slide the claws C and D and the dowels E and F downward, remove the Double Sided Tape from the SPEAKER FPC, and detach

the Cassette Cover.

(4) Disconnect the connector from the SPEAKER FPC Unit, and detach the Zoom Photo Key Ass’y.

(5) Detach the Zoom Top Cover and the Zoom Top Cover Tape1, 2.

Fig. 21

3mmMetalM1.7

d

BlackM1.7

(self tap)

4.5mm

t

Double Sided Tape

Dowel E Dowel F

Dowel B

Claw C

Claw A

Claw D

Connector

Connector

SPEAKER FPC

Zoom Top Cover

Zoom Photo Key Ass'y

Zoom Top Cover Tape 1

Zoom Top Cover Tape 2

Open Knob

Cassette Cover

(5)

(5)

(2)

(4)

(3) (4)

(1) - d(1) - d

(1) - d

(1) - t


25


(1) When attaching the SPEAKER FPC, engage the dowels F and G of the Cassette Cover and secure the SPEAKER FPC with Double

Sided Tape.

(2) When attaching the Cassette Cover, connect the Zoom Photo Key Ass’y flexible cable to the connector. Then, engage the claws C

and D and the dowels E and F while taking care not to dislocate the Speaker.

(3) When attaching the Zoom Photo Key Ass’y, mount the Open Knob and then engage the claws A (two points) and the dowels B (two

points) in that order.


Open Knob : EM-30L (DY9-3031-000)

Note on Reassembling (1),(2)

Note on Reassembling (3) Instruction for Supply

Cassette CoverDowel E Dowel G Dowel F

Claw C Claw D

SPEAKER FPC

Speaker

Double Sided Tape

Zoom Photo Key Ass'y

Dowel B

Open Knob

EM-30L

Claw A

Open Knob Lower Part

Connector

Fig. 22


26


(1) Open the Cassette Cover, detach the Regulation Sheet, and remove one screw (h × 1), and theL Cover Cushion.

Note : Since the Double Sided Tape has a high strength of adhesion, take care not to flaw the Regulation Sheet when

detaching it.

(2) Remove two screws (d × 1, t × 1), UL Tape and detach the Left Cover Shield.

(3) Disengage the dowels A (two points) and the claw B. Then, demount the Speaker, and the SPEAKER FPC.

(4) Detach the Speaker Cushion.

(5) Remove solder (α) (two points), and separate the Speaker from the SPEAKER FPC.

3mmMetalM1.7

d3.5mm

MetalM1.7

h

BlackM1.7

(self tap)

4.5mm

t

L Cover Cushion

Dowel A

Claw B

(5) - αSPEAKER FPC

Speaker CushionSpeaker

(4)

(3)

(3)

(1)

Regulation Sheet

Left Cover Shield

(2) - d

(1) - h

(2)

(2)

(1)

Claw C

UL Tape (9 × 30)

(2) - t

Fig. 23


27


(1) Attach the Speaker Cushion to the position indicated in the figure below.

(2) Attach the SPEAKER FPC to the position indicated in the figure below, and secure it with the claw C of the Left Cover Shield.

(3) Attach the L Cover Cushion as illustrated below.

(4) Attach the UL Tape as illustrated below.


Note on Reassembling (3)Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2)

Left Cover

L Cover Cushion


Attach the Speaker Cushionalong the outline of the metallicpart of the Speaker.Allowable deviation inattachment : ±0.5mm Dowel A Claw B

When attaching the SPEAKERFPC, engage the dowels A andclaw B.

Speaker Cushion

Speaker

Secure with the claw C.

0 ∼ 5.0mm0 ∼ 5.0mm

The root of the flexible cableshall be attached to meetthe internal radius of the cover.

After attaching the UL tape,make sure that the FPC isnot kinky. (To prevent deviation of theoutward position of the FPC)

In the range D, the dimensions indicatedin the figure shall be satisfied.

D

UL Tape (9 × 30)

Fig. 24


28


(1) Remove four screws (d × 1, t × 3), and detach the Cassette Arm Ass’y, Grip Hook Pin, and Grip Hook.

(2) Remove one screw (d × 1), and detach the Click Spring.

(3) Detach the GND Tape1, 2 and the Cassette Arm Sheet.

3mmMetalM1.7

d

BlackM1.7

(self tap)

4.5mm

t

Left Cover

(2)

(1)

(3)(3)

(1)

(1)

(3)

Click Spring

Cassette Arm Ass'y

Cassette Arm Sheet

GND Tape 1

GND Tape 2

Grip Hook

Grip Hook Pin

Dowel A(1) - d

(2) - d

(1) - t

(1) - t

(1) - t

Fig. 25


29


(1) Attach the GND Tape1 to the position indicated in the figure below.

(2) Attach the GND Tape2 to the position indicated in the figure below.

(3) Attach the Click Spring and the Cassette Arm Sheet as illustrated below.

(4) With the Cassette Arm Ass’y open, attach it to the dowel A of the Left Cover and then secure the screw.


Click Spring, two dented spherical points : Hanal FL-778 (DY9-3026-010)

Fig. 26




Left Cover

GND Tape1

GND Tape 2

Attach the GND Tape1 so that it is secured tothe concave part of theLeft Cover.(The GND Tape1 shallnot be unseated.)

Attach according to the outlineof the Cassette Arm Ass'y.No interference with the Stoppershall occur at the time of turning. Allowable deviation ofattachment : ±0.5 mm.

Allowable deviation in attachment,unless otherwise specified : ±0.5 mm.

Align the cutout part with the steppedpart of the left cover.(Protrusion is not allowed.)

Align with the end face of the left cover.(Protrusion is not allowed.)

Click Spring

CassetteArm Ass'y

CassetteArm Sheet

Stopper

Click Spring

Hanal FL-778

Fold the hatched part to the back side.(Fold through an angle 180 according to the shape of the cutout.)


30

1-21 Disassembly of R-LCD Unit - 1

(1) Remove one screw (f × 1), and detach the Rubber Insulation and the Tripod Base.

(2) Remove one screw (e × 1), and detach the Hold Label and the GND Plate.

(3) Remove one screw (f × 1), disengage the claws A and B, and detach the LI Case.

<Notes on Reassembling>

(1) Attach the Hold Label to the position indicated in the figure below.

Fig. 27

e f4mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)


(1)

Tripod Base(1)

(2)

(2)

(3)

Craw B

GND Plate

Craw A

LI Case

(2) - e

(3) - f

GND Plate

(1) - f

Rubber Insulation

Hold Label

Hold Label


31


(1) While being free from the GND Plate, disengage the dowels A and B and the claw C. Then, disconnect the CN102, and detach the

KEY P.C.B.


(1) With the LCD Unit open, attach the KEY P.C.B. to the dowels A and B and the claw C. (Take care not to damage the Switch part.)

Fig. 28


KEY P.C.B.

KEY P.C.B.

KEY P.C.B.

LCD Unit

GND Plate

CN102

(1)

Dowel A

Dowel A

Dowel B

GND Plate

Switch part

Claw C

Claw C

Dowel B

(1)


32


(1) Remove two screws (f × 2), and detach the Hinge Cover, the GND Plate and the LCD Unit. (Turn the Hinge part of the LCD Unit

through an angle of 90º beforehand.)


(1) To the Right Cover Unit, attach the GND Plate, the LCD Unit and the Hinge Cover in that order, and secure then with the screws.

In reassembling, run the LCD FPC through part A of the Hinge Cover.

f

5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)


(1)

(1)

(1)

Right Cover Unit Hinge Cover

GND Plate

LCD Unit

A

A

Hinge Cover

LCD FPC

Part A

(1) - f

(1) - f

Fig. 29


33

1-24 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit

(1) Detach the LED Guide.

(2) Open the Card Cover, disengage the dowel A, and detach the Card Cover Hook.

(3) Pull out the Shaft, and detach the Card Cover.

Note : Take sufficient care not to lose the Shaft.

(4) Introduce tweezers of thin end into the part B, and detach the Blindfold Sheet.


(1) Attach the Card Cover Hook as illustrated below.

Fig. 30


(1)

(2)

(2)

(3)

(3)

LED Guide

Shaft

Card Cover

Card Cover Hook

Card Cover Hook

Dowel A

Dowel A

Press in, and then pull out

Part B(4)

Right Cover Ass'y

Blindfold Sheet

Blindfold Sheet


34

1-25 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 1

(1) Turn the LCD Hinge Unit through an angle of 90º, and remove two screws (g × 2).

(2) Disengage the claws A, B, C and D in that order, and detach the LCD Top Cover.

Note : Take care not to damage the claw hooking parts E and F of the LCD Bottom Cover.

(3) Disconnect the CN901 and CN903, and then detach the LCD Hinge Unit and the LCD DETECT FPC.


(1) Attach the LCD Top Cover as illustrated below.

Fig. 31

g4mm

MetalM1.7


(1)

Claw A

Claw C

Claw DClaw B

Insert the IC part of the DETECT FPCinto the groove.

Fold a surplus part of the flexible cable inside.

(2)

E

F

(3)

(3)

(3)

(3)

CN903

CN901

LCD Hinge Unit

LCD Top Cover

LCD DETECT FPC

(1) - g

(1) - g


35

1-26 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 2

(1) Remove solder (α) (three points), disconnect the LCD Sheet, UL Tape, CN902. Then, detach the LCD P.C.B., the LCD Holder, the

Back Light Ass’y, and the LCD Ass’y.

(2) Disengage the claw A, and detach the LCD Open Knob, the Shaft, and the Spring.

Fig. 32

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1) (2)

LCD P.C.B.

LCD Holder

Back Light Ass'y

LCD Ass'y

LCD Sheet

LCD Sheet

LCD Bottom Cover

CN902

Spring

LCD Open Knob

Shaft

(1) - α

(1) - α

(1) - α

Claw A

UL Tape


36


(1) At the end of reassembling, solder three points (α).

(2) While holding the Shaft and Spring, attach the LCD Open Knob over the claw A.

(3) Attach the LCD Sheet and UL Tape to the position indicated in the figure below.

Fig. 33



Solder α

Solder α

Claw A

Attach with reference to the plate end ofthe LCD panel, and fold a surplus part(upper, lower).

Attach with reference to the plateend of the LCD Holder, and folda surplus part.

Attach in alignment with the plateend of the LCD panel (four sheets).

Guideline forattaching UL Tape.

UL Tape (The tape may have an arbitrary width.)

Spring

Shaft

LCD OpenKnob

LCD Sheet

LCD Sheet

LCD Sheet

LCD Sheet

Fold the leadwire inside,and performsoldering.

Conceal the holesBe sure to cover part.


37

1-27 Disassembly of LCD Hinge Unit

(1) Remove one screw (o × 1), disengage the claws A and B, and detach the Hinge Top Cover, the Hinge Bottom Cover, and the Magnet.

(2) Detach the LCD-KEY FPC from the LCD Hinge Ass’y.


(1) When using the service part LCD-KEY FPC, put “1” and “2”, “3” and “4”, and “5” and “6” on each other in a paired form, and

secure them with the Double Sided Tape on the FPC. Then, fold “7” and “8”, and secure them with the Double Sided Tape on the

FPC.

(2) Wind the LCD-KEY FPC 2 and 1/4 turns from the state illustrated below.

(3) Attach the Magnet so that the painted side (black) will be oriented as shown in the figure below.


LCD winding part : Hanal FL-778 (DY9-3026-010)

Fig. 34

9mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

o



(1)

(1)

(2)

(1)

Claw A

Claw B

LCD-KEY FPC

LCD Hinge Ass'yHinge Top Cover

Hinge Bottom Cover


HanalFL-778

Wind 2-1/4 turns

Fold line Folded part

Allowable deviationof attachment fromoutline: ±0.5 mm.

LCD-KEY FPC

5

31

6

2 4 8

7

(1) - o

Double Sided Tape

Double Sided Tape

Double Sided Tape

Double SidedTape

Magnet

Paint side (Black)


38

1-28 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 1

(1) Remove two screws (n × 1, p × 1), and detach the Grip Belt Plate, the Shaft, and the Grip Belt.

(2) Remove three screws (e × 3), and detach the Battery Terminal Ass’y.


(1) Attach the Battery Terminal Ass’y as illustrated below.

Fig. 35

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

4.5mm

e n4mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

3.5mmMetalM1.7

(self tap)

p


Grip Belt

Grip Belt Plate

Battery Terminal Ass'y

Battery Terminal Ass'y

Shaft

(1)

(1)

(1)

(2)

Run the cablethrough two hooks.

Black Yellow Red

(2) - e

(1) - n

(1) - p


39

1-29 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 2

(1) Remove three screws (n × 2, q × 1), and detach the Power Switch Ass’y.

(2) Remove one screw (n × 1), and detach the Strap Plate.

(3) Remove one screw (n × 1), and detach the Eject Holder, the Spring, and the Eject Knob.

Note : Take care not to lose the Spring.


Entire surface of Spring : Hanal FL-778 (DY9-3026-010)

Fig. 36

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

4.5mm

qn

5.5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

Spring

Rear Cover

Power Switch Ass'y

Eject Holder

Eject Knob

(1)

(3)

(2)

Strap PlateInstruction for Supply

Hanal FL-778

(3) - n

(2) - n

(1) - n

(1) - n

(1) - q

Spring


40

1-30 Disassembly of CVF Unit - 1

(1) Detach the UL Tape from the CAV-CVF FPC, and turn up the CVF.

(2) Detach the FPC Holder.

Note : When detaching the FPC Holder, take the following steps.

1. Disengage the claw A.

2. Using tweezers or the like, disengage the claw B from the back side. Detach the FPC Holder while sliding it.

At this step, take care not to damage the flexible cable.

(3) Detach the Dust Cover.


(1) Secure the CAV-CVF FPC with the UL Tape as illustrated below.

Fig. 37

Note Note on Reassembling (1)

FPC Holder

Claw B

Claw A

Claw B

Claw A

CAV-CVF FPC UL Tape (13 × 50)

Dust Cover

CVF Hinge Ass'y

(3)

(1)

(2) UL Tape (13 × 50)

FPC Holder


41


(1) Remove two screws (k × 2), and detach the CVF Bottom Cover and the CVF Click Plate.

Note : Disengage the dowel A, and detach the CVF Click Plate while sliding it.

(2) Remove one screw (e × 1), and detach the CVF Click Spring.

(3) Detach the CVF Inner part.

Note : Using tweezers or the like, detach the CVF Inner part while pushing it upward as illustrated below.

Fig. 38

ke2.5mm

MetalM1.7

4mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

Note

Note

CVF Click Plate

CVF Bottom Cover

CVF Click Spring

(3)(1)

(2)

(2) - e

(1) - k

Dowel A

CVF Inner Part

Pull out

Push UP

Tweezers


42


(1) When attaching the CVF Bottom Cover, push the CAV-CVF FPC inside as illustrated below.


CVF Click Plate : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)

Rail part of CVF Top Cover, two points : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)

Inside-wall rail part of CVF Top Cover, four points : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)

Fig. 39


CAV-CVF FPC CVF Bottom CoverPush in

CVF Click PlateHanal KS-39M


CVF Top Cover's rail partsHanarl KS-39M

CVF Top Cover's inner wall rail partsHanarl KS-39M


43


(1) Disengage two claws A, and detach the CVF Inner Bottom Cover Ass’y.

(2) Remove two screws (k × 2), and detach the CVF Hinge Unit.


(1) Attach the CVF Inner Bottom Cover Ass’y as illustrated below.

Fig. 40

k2.5mm

MetalM1.7


First engage the Eye Piece side (claw B)and engage the claw A.

Claw A

Claw A

(2)CVF Top Cover

CVF Hinge Unit

Running CVF FPCbetween the ribs.

Claw B

Eye Piece

CVF FPC

(2) - k

(1)

CVF Inner Bottom Cover Ass'y


44


(1) Disengage two claws A, and detach the CAV-CVF FPC, the CVF Mask, and the other parts between them.

(2) Disengage two claws B, and detach the CVF Reflector from the CVF P.C.B.

(3) Disconnect the CN4101 and CN4102, and detach the CAV-CVF FPC and the CVF Ass’y.


(1) When mounting the CVF Reflector, push the CVF Mask, CVF Ass’y, Cushion and Diffuser lightly in the arrow direction.

(2) Insert the CVF Ass’y flexible cable under the rib of the CVF Inner Cover as illustrated below.

Fig. 41



Claw B

Claw B

Claws A

(3)(3)

CN4102

CN4101

CAV-CVF FPC

CVF Inner Cover

CVF Mask

CVF Ass'y

Cushion

Diffuser

CVF Reflector

CVF P.C.B.

CVF Reflector Part

Push in

Ribs

(2)


45


(1) Remove one screw (r × 1), and detach the CVF Knob, Rubber, and CVF Lens Holder.

(2) Disengage two claws A, and detach the Lens1 and Lens2.


(1) When attaching the Lens1 and Lens2 to the CVF Lens Holder, take care not to mistake the orientation of the Lens1/Lens2.

(2) When attaching the CVF Knob, engage the dowel of the CVF Lens Holder as illustrated below. Take care not to forget to attach the

Rubber.


CVF Inner Cover inside, 8 points on sliding rail part : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)

Rubber top surface : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)

r2.3mm

MetalM1.7

Steped Screw

Instruction for SupplyNote on Reassembling (2)


CVF Inner Cover

(1)

CVF Knob

(1)

(2)

Claw A

Rubber

CVF Lens Holder

Lens 1

Lens 2

CVF Lens Holder

CVF Inner Cover Lens 2Lens 1

Rubber top surface

Hanal : KS-39M

Sliding parts of rail

CVF Knob

CVF Lens Holder

(1) - r

Rubber

Sliding parts of rail

Fig. 42


46

1-35 Disassembly of Camera Unit

(1) Detach the CCD-CAV FPC from the CN1070.

(2) Remove two screws (f × 2), and detach the CCD P.C.B., CCD Ass’y, Rubber, and IR Filter.

(3) Unsolder the parts A, and detach the CCD Ass’y from the CCD P.C.B.


(1) When soldering on the CCD P.C.B., secure the CCD Ass’y and the CCD P.C.B. with two screws (f × 2).

Fig. 43

f

5mm

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

Face thickside towardCCD side

IR Filter

IR Filter

Lens Unit

Lens

Rubber

CCD Ass'y

Parts A

CCD

CCD P.C.B.

CCD P.C.B.

(3)

(3)

(2)

CCD - CAV FPCCN1070

(1)

(1) - f


47

1-36 Disassembly of Lens Unit

(1) Remove seven screws (n × 3, p × 2, s × 2), and detach the IG Meter Ass’y.

(2) Unsolder the part (α), and detach the PZ Motor and AF Motor.


(1) Run the flexible cable through the groove of part A.

Fig. 44

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

4.5mm

n

MetalM1.7

(self tap)

4.5mm

s

3.5mmMetalM1.7

(self tap)

p


(2) - α

(2) - α

(2) - α

(2) - α(1)

(2)

(2)PZ Motor

IG Meter Ass'y

AF Motor

A

(1) - s

(1) - n

(1) - p(1) - p

(1) - n


48

1-37 List of Screws Used

PARTS NO. PARTS NO. ILLUSTS

YM

BO

LPARTS NO. REMARKS ILLUST

SY

MB

OL

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

XA1-7170-507 M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)

XA1-7170-407 M1.7-4.0mm (Metal)

M1.7-3.5mm (Metal)

XA1-7170-607 M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)

M1.7-2.5mm (Metal)

M1.7-5.5mm (Metal)

M1.7-3.0mm (Metal)

XA1-3170-507

XA4-9170-407

XA1-7170-307

M1.7-2.0mm (Metal)

Flat Head Screw

M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)XA1-7170-257

DA3-1026-000Steped Screw

M1.7-4.5mm (Metal)

XA4-9170-907

XA4-5170-457

Self Tap

M1.7-9.0mm (Metal)

XA4-9170-357Self Tap

M1.7-3.5mm (Metal)


M1.7-5.5mm (Metal)

Steped Screw

M1.7-2.3mm (Metal)

Self Tap

M1.7-4.5mm (Metal)

XA9-1166-000

XA9-1167-000Steped Screw

M1.7-3.4mm (Metal)

XA1-7170-557

XA1-7170-207


M1.7-4.5mm (Metal)


M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)

Self Tap

M1.7-4.0mm (Metal)

XA1-7170-357

k

l

m

n

o

p

q

r

s

t XA4-9170-459Self Tap

M1.7-4.5mm Black

9mm

3.4mm

4.5mm

4.5mm

2.5mm

4mm

5mm

3.5mm

5.5mm

2mm

5mm

6mm

3mm

5mm

4mm

4.5mm

5.5mm

3.5mm

2.3mm

4.5mm


49

1-38 List of Disassembly Photos

Right Side Top Side

Front Side Camera / Recorder Unit

Camera Unit Front Cover Unit


50

Left Cover Unit Right Cover Unit

Rear Cover Unit LCD Unit

SERVICE MODE · ADJUSTMENT

CONTENTS

1. Maintenance Tools ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1

1-1 List of Maintenance Tools -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1

2. Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2

2-1 Using the Extension Connectors ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2

2-2 Setting A ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3

2-3 Setting B ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4

3. Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5

3-1 Outline ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5

3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5

3-3 How to Operate Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------- 6

3-4 Indication in Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7

4. Description of Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8

4-1 Error Rate --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

4-2 Mechanical Error Indication ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9

4-2-1 Mechanical Error Normal Mode --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9

4-3 Cleaning Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10

4-4 Commands Particular to Camera ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10

4-5 Checking the Lens Resetting --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11

4-6 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12

4-6-1 MODE MI-COM Input Port ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12

4-6-2 MODE MI-COM A/D Port ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 12

4-6-3 FR MI-COM Input Port ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13

4-6-4 FR MI-COM A/D Port ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13

5. Adjustment Procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 14

5-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14

5-1-1 Indication in Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 16

5-2 AF Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17

5-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18

5-2-2 Cam Correction (AUTO) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19

5-3 IS Section Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20

5-3-1 Gyro Offset Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20

5-3-2 Gyro Gain Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 20

5-3-3 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21

5-4 Camera Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22

5-4-1 Iris Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22

5-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22

5-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23

5-4-4 WB Adjustment (2) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23

5-4-5 WB Adjustment (3) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24

5-4-6 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24

5-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25

5-5-1 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation (AUTO) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25

5-6 CVF Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 26

5-6-1 Forced CVF ON ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26

5-6-2 CVF Frequency Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26

5-6-3 Contrast Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27

5-6-4 Brightness Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 28

5-6-5 Black Limiter Level Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 29

5-6-6 COM Amplitude Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30

5-6-7 COM-DC Level Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31

5-6-8 Flash Memory Writing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32

5-6-9 Release of Forced CVF ON------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 32

5-7 Color Balance Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 33

5-8 Recorder Section Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34

5-8-0 LCD PCB Setting Destination --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34

5-8-1 SWP Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 34

5-8-2 C. FG Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34

5-8-3 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35

5-8-4 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35

5-8-5 Flash Memory Writing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35

5-9 Tape Path Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 36

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 ESERVICE MODE · ADJUSTMENT

1

1. Maintenance Tools

1-1 List of Maintenance Tools

Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks

Alignment Tape, (Color bar master/PAL) DY9-1381-000 Recorder electrical adjustment

Alignment Tape (tracking) DY9-1379-000 Running adjustment DMC III

Cassette Torque Gauge for DV DY9-1346-000 Running adjustment DMC III

DV Cleaning Tape (hard) DY9-1384-000 Head cleaning DMC III

Driver bit for tape path adjustment DY9-2053-000 Tape path adjustment DMC III

Color bar chart DY9-2002-000 Camera electrical adjustment

Color Viewer 5600° K for 220V DY9-2039-220 Camera electrical adjustment (for 220)

Color Viewer 5600° K for 240V DY9-2039-240 Camera electrical adjustment (for 240)

Lamp for Color Viewer 5600K DY9-2040-000 Replacement

Filter, CCA W12ø46mm DY9-2046-000 Camera electrical adjustment

Cassette for changeover to service mode DY9-1386-000 Service mode, electrical adjustment

Extension Flexible cable (24pin) DY9-1390-000 Test pin extended

Extension connector (24 pins) DY9-1395-000 Test pin extended NEW


2

2. Setting

(1) Adjustments other than DMC-III : Perform adjustments in the product state.

(2) Tracking adjustment (DMC-III) and Envelope check : Perform them with the Setting A.

(3) Adjustments related to DMC-III other than Tracking adjustment, tape path system check and tape path system cleaning : Perform

them with the Setting B.

2-1 Using the Extension Connectors

(1) Attach the two extension connectors (DY9-1395-000) to the

extension flexible cable (DY9-1390-000)

Important

Secure the two connectors with tape as shown in

the figure. (When removing the extension con-

nector assembly from the main unit after use, the

connector coupling may be detached in some

cases. If the connector located on the main unit

side comes off, it becomes impossible to remove

it from the main unit. To prevent this, secure the

connectors with tape beforehand.)

(2) Detach the blindfold sheet.

(3) Connect the extension connectors to the CN2900.

<Signals used>

Fig. 3

Pin No.Signal

Designation

2 EVF HD

3 GND

15 SWP

19 PBRF

Pin No.Signal

Designation

21 EVF R

22 EVF COM

23 EVF G

24 EVF B

Fig. 2

DY9-1390-000

DY9-1395-000

Secure with tape.

DY9-1395-000

Fig. 1

BLINDFOLD SHEET


3

2-2 Setting A

Envelope observation)

(1) Observe a PB-RF signal output from each extension connector that has been attached in 2-1 “Using the Extension Connectors”.

Tracking Adjustment)

(1) Detach the regulation cover.

* : To avoid flawing the regulation cover, detach it from the inside of the left cover as illustrated.

(2) While observing a PB-RF signal, adjust the post to eliminate

fluctuations of the envelope.

Note : When the tracking adjustment is going to be per-

formed, refer to “5-9 Tape Path Adjustment” on

p.36.

Fig. 4

REGULATION COVER

LEFT COVER

REGULATION COVER

Fig. 5

ADJUSTMENT DRIVER(DY9-2053-000)


4

2-3 Setting B

(1) Remove the FRONT COVER, REAR COVER, LEFT COVER UNIT, RIGHT COVER UNIT referring to “Disassembling”.

Note 1 : Referring to Fig.5, connect the required cables.

Note 2 : Observe the signal in the same manner as that for setting A.

Note 3 : For ejection, use the switch concerned on the P.C.B. For mode transition, use the wireless remote controller.

Fig. 6

MONITOR TV

WIRELESS CONTROLLER

CA-570

LEFT COVER UNIT

FRONT COVER UNIT

FRONT COVERUNIT

REAR COVER UNIT

REAR COVER UNIT

MAIN P.C.B.CN100

MAIN P.C.B.CN101

JACK1 P.C.B.CN51

JACK1 P.C.B.CN3211

JACK1 P.C.B.CN51

MAIN P.C.B.CN2101

JACK1 P.C.B.CN3211

MAIN P.C.B.CN3201

MAIN P.C.B.CN3201

MAIN P.C.B.CN101

JACK2 P.C.B.EJECT SWITCH


5

3. Service Modes

3-1 Outline

(1) The service mode in this equipment uses the wireless remote controller. (To be used in remote control code 2)

(2) For changeover to the service mode, a dedicated tool (CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE: DY9-1386-000) is required in addition to

the wireless remote controller.

(3) Mode changeover is available between the service mode and the normal mode using the “Audio dubbing” and “SLOW” keys of the

wireless remote controller.

As long as power is ON, the service mode is available even if the “CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE” is removed.

(4) In the service mode, changeover of the main unit operation mode can be handled using the keys on the main unit and the remote control

mode 1.

(5) In the service mode, safety functions such as for mechanical error detection, DEW detection and low voltage detection are canceled.

(6) In the service mode, the LCD mirror function is canceled.

3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode

(1) Set the cassette for changeover to service mode (DY9-1386-

000) in the equipment and load the data.

(2) Press the “Dubbing” key on the wireless remote controller

that is set at Remote controller code 2.

* To changeover to Remote controller code 2, press

“Remote controller setting” and “Zoom T” keys si-

multaneously for 2 sec.

* The remote controller code setting on the DVC main

unit is operable both at remote controller codes 1

and 2.

(3) Now the changeover to the service mode has been completed

and the SERVICE MODE appears on the screen.

* Pressing the “SLOW” key performs the changeover

to the normal mode from the service mode.

As long as the power supply is ON, the service mode

is available by setting the “Audio dubbing” key even

if the cassette for transfer to service mode is re-

moved.

Fig. 7

DY9-1386-000

Fig. 8


6

3-3 How to Operate Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode

(1) To use the wireless remote controller in the service mode, set it at Remote controller code 2.

* To changeover to Remote controller code 2, press the “Remote controller setting” and “Zoom T” keys simulta-

neously for 2 sec.

Fig. 9

3. START/STOP

2. SLOW 1. DUBBING

5. SEARCH -

4. SERCH +

8. FF

11. PLAY

6. FRAME +

14. × 2

12. STOP

10. SERCH SELECT

9. REW

7. FRAME -

13. PAUSE

Remote ControllerCode 2 setting

No. Key Designation (in Normal Mode) Key Designation (in Service Mode) Function

1 DUBBING SERVICE MODE Change over to service mode

2 SLOW NORMAL MODE Change over to normal mode

3 START/STOP CS+ Increases CS by 1.

4 SEARCH + FUNCTION + Increases FUNCTION by 1.

5 SEARCH - FUNCTION - Decreases FUNCTION by 1.

6 FRAME + HIGH ADDRESS + Increases HIGH ADDRESS by 1.

7 FRAME - HIGH ADDRESS - Decreases HIGH ADDRESS by 1.

8 FF ADDRESS + Increases ADDRESS by 1.

9 REW ADDRESS - Decreases ADDRESS by 1.

10 SEARCH SELECT MODE SELECT Change over to RD/WR mode

11 PLAY DATA + Increases DATA by 1.

12 STOP DATA - Decreases DATA by 1.

13 PAUSE STORE Defines/w rites DATA.

14 2 EJECT Performs EJECT.


7

3-4 Indication in Service Mode

Shown below are the indications in the service mode.

1. Indicates that the service mode is currently selected. (“SERV”)

2. MODE : Indicates the MODE currently selected. (RD/WR/ST)

3. Indicates for which block the command is specified. (MA,MD, CA, CD, etc.)

4. CS : Indicates the Chip Select currently specified. (0~F)

5. Function : Indicates the Function currently selected. (00~FF)

6. ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS currently selected. (0000~FFFF)

7. DT : Indicate, in hexadecimal representation, the DATA currently being read or set. (00~FF)

8. Indicates the mechanical status. (POPUP, STBY, LOAD1, LOAD2, STOP, PLAY)

9. Indicates the absolute track No.

10. Indicates the mechanical error. (Main power supply backup)

11. Indicates mechanical error history (LITHIUM 3V battery backup)

12. Indicates the version of the MAIN program in the FR MI-COM.

13. Indicates the version of the MODE MI-COM.

14. Indicates the version of the CAMERA program in the FR MI-COM.

15. Indicates the version of the CARD program in the FR MI-COM.

16. E0 : Indicates the error rate of the track that is traced in the CH0 (Low ch) head.

17. E1 : Indicates the error rate of the track that is traced in the CH1 (High ch) head.

18. Data Write status (00: READ mode, 04 : Write preparation, OC : Write execution)

Fig. 10

14

2

3

5 6

7

8 9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16 17

18


8

4. Description of Service Modes

4-1 Error Rate

<Generals>

(1) A VIDEO error rate (VIDEO + AUDIO) and an AUDIO error rate can be checked.

(2) Note that the error rate is worsened on occurrence of failure in tape running, deterioration of tape, decreased in head output, failure

in head amplifier, improper drum shield, etc.

<How to read a VIDEO error rate>

An average error rate on 64-track AUDIO+VIDEO sector is indi-

cated in exponential representation.

Example) ‘25’ is indicated:

Error rate = 2×10 -5

<How to read an AUDIO error rate>

To read error rate of AUDIO track, follow the procedures in the

table below.

The number of erroneous sync block of 64-track AUDIO sync

blocks is indicated in two hexadecimal digits.

(FF limitation is imposed on a value exceeding 255.)

Example) ‘23’is indicated:

Number of erroneous sync blocks = 35

Important

After the adjustment, set the DT to the product setting . (press STORE key at 1 of STEP 1 state.)

<Change to an AUDIO error rate>

In the product specifications, the error rate on both chan-

nels in self -recording LP playback is as follows :

Error rate =28H or less

(Number of erroneous sync blocks = 40 or less)

Fig. 11

Low ch. High ch.

EO 2 5 E1

2 × 10-5

Fig. 12

Low ch. High ch.

(hexadecimal)

(decimal)

AO 2 3 A1

2

(2 ×16)+ 3 = 35

3

STEP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation

CS Function ADDR MODE DT

1 1) Make setting shown at right. 0 10 001D ST 00 03 Product setting

2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD 03 Audio error rate indication

Remarks) Selecting DT back to "0"makes a return to Audio + Video error rate.

MONITOR


9

4-2 Mechanical Error Indication

<Outline>

(1) On occurrence of a mechanical error, the conditions of the error can be checked in the service mode. (Normal indication mode and

analysis mode available)

(2) In the normal indication mode of the mechanical error, two types of indications appear on the service mode initial screen: the data

indication retained only by the main battery and the error history data indication backed up by LITHIUM 3V.

(3) The data backed up by the LITHIUM 3V can be reset by the STEP-1 operation shown below.

4-2-1 Mechanical Error Normal Mode



1 1) Make setting shown at right. 0 08 0008 ST 00

2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD Completion of backup data resetting

MONITOR

Fig. 13

EBDCSTLD

: TAPE END: TAPE TOP: DRUM ERROR: CAPSTAN ERROR: S-REEL ERROR: T- REEL ERROR: LOADING MTR ERROR: DEW ERROR

Relevant errors are highlighted in purple.


10

4-3 Cleaning Mode

When cleaning the head with hard-type cleaning tape (DY9-1384-000), set up the cleaning mode according to the procedure given

below.

Note : After head cleaning, be sure to restore the settings to normal.

4-4 Commands Particular to Camera

<Outline>

(1) The commands particular to camera are provided for checking the operation.

(2) Make preparation according to the table below and carry out the desired commands particular to camera.

(3) To restore any setting back to the original status, press the PAUSE key (STORE) for each item again in the “ST” mode.

Turning the power OFF/ON resets all the settings.

STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation


1 1) Make setting shown at right. 0 10 0111 ST --

2) Increases DT by 2. --

(Change bit-02 to 1 from 0.)

(Example: 80 82)

3) Perform STORE. (Press PAUSE key. RD -- Completion of cleaning mode setup

2 1) Change over to the normal mode and turn OFF the power supply. Resetting of cleaning mode


CAM SPECIAL COMMAND CS Function ADDR MODE DT

WB SET 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3300 ST --

2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- WB is set.

WB 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3301 ST --

LOCK 2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- WB is locked.


TURBO 2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- WB high-speed setting mode


OUTDOOR 2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- WB outdoor mode


INDOOR 2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- WB indoor mode

IRIS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3305 ST --

OPEN 2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- The iris is opened forcibly.

IRIS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3306 ST --

CLOSE 2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- The iris is closed forcibly.

ND ON 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3307 ST --

2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- ND inserted

ND OFF 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3308 ST --

2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- ND in standby state

AGC 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3309 ST --

MAX 2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- A value of AGC gain is maximized.

AGC 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330A ST --

MIN 2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- A value of AGC gain is minimized.

COLOR 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330B ST --

BAR 2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- Outputs color bar from DIGIC DV.

White 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330C ST --

100% 2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- Outputs white 100% from DIGIC DV.

White 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330D ST --

50% 2) Execute STORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- Outputs white 50% from DIGIC DV.

MONITOR


11

4-5 Checking the Lens Resetting

<Generals>

(1) Set up addresses according to the table shown below. Thus, using data marked with the arrows in the figure below, you can check

whether lens resetting has been completed or not.

* In case of 40 or 44, the zoom lens has not yet been reset.

* In case of 80 or 84, the focus lens has not yet been reset.



1 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 00 8300 RD -- RAM data indication

MONITOR

Fig. 14


12

4-6 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches

<Generals>

(1) The MODE and FR MI-COM terminals can be checked in the service mode. With this function, the key-related operations and the

connections between the keys and the MI-COM terminals can be checked in the product state.

(2) Perform the check in the RD mode.

4-6-1 MODE MI-COM Input Port

4-6-2 MODE MI-COM A/D Port

PIN NAME Description CS Function ADDR

95 KEY AD3 KEY AD 3 1 02 0000 MENU(00) SET(40)

93 KEY AD2 KEY AD 2 1 02 0001 STOP(00) PLAY(40) FF(85)

92 KEY AD1 KEY AD 1 1 02 0002 DE ON/OFF(00) DE SEL. (40) AE(85)

91 KEY AD0 KEY AD 0 1 02 0003 D.CODE(00) C.MIX(40) REW(85)

88 Batt Info A/D Battery temperature detection 1 02 0006

87 Batt A/D Battery voltage detection 1 02 0007 Low(00) High(FF)

Low(FF) High(00)

AD DATA (00～FF)

PIN NAME Description CS Function ADDR DATA BIT

25 Li3V DetectDetection of decrease in lithiumbattery voltage 1 01 0007 3

42 Dial CCW Switch Select Dial ↓ 1 01 0005 2

43 Dial CW Switch Select Dial 1 01 0005 1

64 PANEL Open Switch LCD open detection 1 01 0002 6

65 PANEL Bottom/Top Switch LCD reverse detection 1 01 0002 5

66 Eject Switch EJECT SW detection 1 01 0002 4

67 Cassette In Switch Cassette IN SW detection 1 01 0002 3

68 Photo Switch Full pressing of Photo SW 1 01 0002 2

69 Half Photo Switch Halfway pressing of Photo SW 1 01 0002 1

70 START STOP Start / Stop SW 1 01 0002 0

71 DC J DET DC JACK detection 1 01 0001 7

75 PAE/GREEN SW P.AE/GREEN SW 1 01 0001 3

76 VTR Power Switch POWER SW (VCR) 1 01 0001 2

77 CAM Power Switch POWER SW (CAMERA) 1 01 0001 1

78 T/C PW SW Tape/Card SW 1 01 0001 0

80 DC V DET Input voltage from DC jack 1 01 0000 6

82 KEY AD4 REC PAUSE KEY 1 01 0000 4


13

4-6-3 FR MI-COM Input Port

4-6-4 FR MI-COM A/D Port

PIN NAME Description CS Function ADDRAA16 ZOOMKEY Zoom key output 0 02 0002 TELE

sideWIDEside

AC17 TEMP Lens thermometer output 0 02 0003

X15 Y GYRO YAW side GYRO output 0 02 0004

AB16 P GYRO PITCH side GYRO output 0 02 0005

Y15 I ENC IRIS ENC output 0 02 0006 Small diaphragm Open

AA15 MSW AD Mechanical position 0 02 000A

AC15 DEW DEW detection 0 02 000BY14 CAS IN Cassette detection 0 02 000C Cassette

insertedCassettenot inserted

AC14 WIDE DET Wide signal detection 0 02 000D

AA14 TAPE T OP Beginning detection 0 02 000E

AB14 TAPE END Ending detection 0 02 000F

AD DATA (00～FF)

Intermediate

PIN NAME Description CS Function ADDR DATA BIT

P6 SDET S JACK detection 0 01 0000 5

W1 USB DET USB Detect 0 01 0009 5

X5 CARD DET CARD detection 0 01 0009 4

E3 REC PROOF Tape recording inhibition 0 01 000A 7

U6 CARD PRO Card recording inhibited 0 01 000A 2


14

5. Adjustment Procedures

5-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement

After replacement of major parts, carry out adjustment referring to the table shown below. Note that the following table shows minimum

required adjustments to be performed after replacing any major part. In case that two or more parts have been replaced or any faulty

condition has occurred, take a proper adjustment procedure accordingly.

: Adjustmentrequired

Camera system

Part name

No. Adjustment itemLens

JACK1PCB

CCD CVFMAINPCB

CAVPCB

Adjustment setting

5-2 AF section

5-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment Product condition

5-2-2 Cam Correction (AUTO) Product condition

5-3 IS section

5-3-1 Gyro Offset Adjustment Product condition

5-3-2 Gyro Gain Check Product condition

5-3-3 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing Product condition

5-4 Camera section

5-4-1 Iris Adjustment Product condition

5-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) Product condition

5-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment Product condition



5-4-6 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing Product condition

5-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation Product condition

5-6-1 Forced CVF ON Product condition

5-6-2 CVF Frequency Adjustment Product condition

5-6-3 Contrast Adjustment Product condition

5-6-4 Brightness Adjustment Product condition

5-6-5 Black Limiter Level Adjustment Product condition

5-6-6 COM Amplitude Adjustment Product condition

5-6-7 COM-DC Level Adjustment Product condition

5-6-8 Flash Memory Writing Product condition

5-6-9 Release of Forced CVF ON Product condition

5-7 Color Balance Check Product condition

5-6 CVF Adjustment


15

Recorder system

Part name

No. Adjustment item MAINPCB

DMCIII

Adjustment setting

5-8 Recorder section

5-8-0 LCD PCB Setting Destination Product condition

5-8-1 SWP Adjustment Product condition

5-8-2 C. FG Adjustment Product condition

5-8-3 Automatiac Adjustment of Reel FG Product condition

5-8-4 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment Product condition

5-8-5 Flash Memory Writing Product condition

DMC III

5-9 Tape Path AdjustmentTape pathadjustment setting


16

Fig. 15

3

1

2

4 5

8 9 10 11 12 13 6

7

5-1-1 Indication in Service Mode

Shown below are the indications in the service mode.

1. MODE : Indicates the MODE currently selected. (RD/WR/ST)

2. Indicates for which block the command is specified. (MA, MD, CA, CD, etc.)

3. CS : Indicates the Chip Select currently specified. (0~F)

4. Function : Indicates the Function currently selected. (00~FF)

5. ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS currently selected. (0000~FFFF)

6. DT : Indicate, in hexadecimal representation, the DATA currently being read or set. (00~FF)

7. Data write status (0 : Read mode, 1 : Ready to write, C : Write execution)

8. ST : Adjustment status (02: During adjustment, 05: Adjustment OK, 09: Adjustment NG)

9. ST2 : Adjustment status (for use in AF adjustment)

At the time of IS adjustment

10. IS1 : Yaw Gyro gain

11. IS2 : Pitch Gyro gain

12. IS3 : Yaw Gyro offset

13. IS4 : Pitch Gyro offset


17

5-2 AF Section Adjustment

Note)

(1) The sections 5-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment and 5-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be executed consecutively. If they are

performed independently, the sufficient performance cannot be obtained.

Also, when section 5-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment is completed, execute section 5-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be

executed immediately without elapse of time. If execute section 5-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) is executed after elapse of time

upon completion of section 5-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment, the sufficient performance cannot be obtained.

Preparation)

(1) For CZ automatic adjustment/cam correction, set the product condition.

(2) Adjustment condition (initial condition)

Tape/Card : Tape

Program AE : Auto Mode

ZOOM : Telephoto-end

CZ adjustment chart : 2.4 ± 0.02 m from lens front

Chart luminance : 500 lux or more (High illuminance should be avoided at the wide-angle end.)


18

5-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment

CHART CZ adjustment chart

SPEC. At STEP 3, DT : AA should be attained. Execution of STEP 4.

Procedure)

(1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV.

(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out CZ automatic adjustment in the service mode.

(3) Perform the cam correction.

Fig. 16

ST2


CZ CS Function MD ADDR DT ST2

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3100 00

2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Move to adjustment mode.

(press the PAUSE button.)

2 2) Perform storing. 2 08 ST 3100 --

(press the PAUSE button.) Automatic adjustment is started. Then, it is

completed in 30 seconds approximately. If any NG

condition is encountered in automatic adjustment,

check the parts inside the lens section.

3 Judgment on result of adjustment 2 08 RD 3100 AA Adjustment is completed (result is OK).

Perform the cam correction.

RD FF Adjustment is completed (result is NG).

Take the procedure again from the beginning.

4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 08 ST 0081 -- Preparation for flash memory updating.

2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Execution of flash memory updating.


MONITOR


19

5-2-2 Cam Correction (AUTO)

CHART CZ adjustment chart

SPEC. Automatic adjustment

Procedure)

(1) Quit the service mode, and turn power OFF/ON.

(2) Perform the cam correction by following the table below.

(3) Quit the service mode, turn power off/on, and then check that proper focusing can be attained in normal zooming operation (AF

OFF).

(4) If the result is NG, perform 5-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment and 5-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO).


CAM CORRECTION CS Function MD ADDR DT ST2


2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ 01


2

3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3202 --

↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ 02 Correction value measurement.

(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST2:02.


2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ 04 Correction value calculation.

(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST2:04.


2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ AA Completion of correction value writing.

(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST2:AA.




Cancel the service mode, and set the zoom position to the telephoto end. After focus movement is stopped,

turn OFF the AF function.

MONITOR


20

5-3 IS Section Adjustment

Note)

(1) Perform the IS adjustment after machine is re-assembled to a product status.

(2) Prepare a tripod or stable work bench.

(3) Each of the adjustment data (5-3-1, 2) becomes valid when 5-3-3 data writing is made. After completion of each adjustment, be

sure to carry out 5-3-3 before turning power OFF.

5-3-1 Gyro Offset Adjustment

SPEC. Automatic adjusutment

Procedure)

(1) Wait at least 10 seconds while being careful not to apply vibration to the camera.

(2) Referring to the table shown below, perform the automatic adjustment.

Note)

It will take approx. 25 seconds at maximum to complete adjustment (OK) after storing (pressing the pause button).

5-3-2 Gyro Gain Check

Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out data checkup.


GYRO OFFSET CS Function MD ADDR DT ST

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 RD 320D -- Check that IS1 = IS2 = 88.

2) Check data.

MONITOR


GYRO OFFSET CS Function MD ADDR DT ST

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 320D 00

2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ 05 Adjustment is completed.

(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST:05, NG with ST:09

After adjustment, data is indicated at IS3 and IS4.

MONITOR

IS1 : Yaw Gyro gain IS2 : Pitch Gyro gain IS3 : Yaw Gyro offset IS4 : Pitch Gyro offset

ST

IS4IS3IS2IS1

Fig. 17


21

5-3-3 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing

SPEC. Automatic writing

Procedure)

(1) According to the table shown below, write adjustment data (5-3-1) into the virtual EEPROM and flash memory.


EEPROM & FLASH WRITING CS Function MD ADDR DT ST

1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 320F 00

2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ 05 Completion of virtual EEPROM writing.

(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST:05, NG with ST:09


2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ Execution of flash memory updating.


MONITOR

Fig. 18

ST


22

5-4 Camera Section Adjustment

Notes)

(1) Each adjustment data (5-4-1 to 5-4-5) becomes effective after it is written into the DATA as mentioned in 5-4-6. If power must be

turned OFF/ON during each adjustment, be sure to perform the DATA write procedure as mentioned in 5-4-6.

(2) The adjustments from 5-4-2 through 5-4-5 must be carried out in series.

Preparation)

(1) For camera section adjustment, take the product condition.


Tape/Card : Tape

Program AE : Auto Mode

AF : OFF

Image stabilizer : OFF

Chart : Standard angle of view

5-4-1 Iris Adjustment

CHART

SPEC. Automatic adjustment.

Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, adjust the Iris.

5-4-2 WB Adjustment (1)

CHART Light box (5600°K)


Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (1).

Note) In this adjustment, color balance gain data is set to FF. Be sure to carry out color balance adjustment de-

scribed in 5-4-3.


IRIS CS Function MD ADDR DT ST


2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ Adjustment is in progress.

(press the PAUSE button.) ↑ ↑ RD ↑ 05 Adjustment is completed.

Completion with ST:05 (ST:09 NG)

MONITOR


WB (1) CS Function MD ADDR DT ST





MONITOR


23

5-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment

CHART Lightbox (5600°K), and color bar chart

M.EQ. Vectorscope

TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT

SPEC. R : × 2.0 (ratio to burst) 90°, Ye : × 1.0 (ratio to burst) 180°

Procedure)

(1) For manual adjustment of color balance, change data at the following four addresses while observing a vectorscope.


CHART Light box (5600°K), and CCA12 filter


Procedure)








MONITOR


CB (MANUAL) CS Function MD ADDR DT

R GAIN 1) In the setting shown at right, adjust relevant data. 2 08 ST 3007 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.

2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ADJ Adjustment is completed.


Ye GAIN 1) Make the setting shown at right. ST 3008 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.

2) Perform storing. RD ADJ Adjustment is completed.


Ye PHASE 1) Make the setting shown at right. ST 3009 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.



R PHASE 1) Make the setting shown at right. ST 300A "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.



MONIT OR


24


CHART Light box (5600°K)


Procedure)


5-4-6 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing

SPEC. Automatic writing

Procedure)

(1) According to the table shown below, write adjustment data (5-4-1 to 5-4-5) into the virtual EEPROM and flash memory.







MONITOR


EEPROM & FLASH WRITING CS Function MD ADDR DT ST



(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST:05, ST:09 NG




MONITOR


25

5-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation

Notes)

(1) Before starting this adjustment, turn power on for 30 minutes.

(2) In this adjustment, NG is indicated if there are twelve or more pixel defects on the entire screen. (In the case of NG, no compensa-

tion is made.)

(3) The picture element loss correction which is validated by this adjustment is also validated automatically every time power is turned

ON.

5-5-1 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation (AUTO)

Preparation)

(1) Carry out this correction in the product state.

(2) Adjustment Conditions

Program AE : AUTO

AF : OFF


Digital zoom : OFF

Procedure)

(1) Perform the CCD void pixel correction (automatic mode) according to the table shown below.


CS Function MD ADDR DT ST

1 CCD void pixel correction

1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 300E 00



Completion with DT:00 to 0C, NG with DT:8*

2 Virtual EEPROM writing

2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 300F 00


(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with DT:02, NG with DT:03




MONITOR


26

5-6 CVF Adjustment

Notes)

(1) Each adjustment data (5-6-2 to 5-6-7) becomes effective after it is written into the DATA as mentioned in 5-6-8. If power must be

turned OFF/ON during each adjustment, be sure to perform the DATA write procedure as mentioned in 5-6-8.

(2) The adjustments from 5-6-2 through 5-6-7 must be carried out in series.

Preparation)

(1) Carry out CVF adjustment in the product condition.

(2) For copying black and white master, the service manual CD-ROM and SD card are required.

After formatting the SD card, copy the data to an SD card from the appendix of the service manual CD-ROM.

Destination folder of saving : DCIM/101CANON, File name: IMG0001.jpg


Tape/Card : Card

5-6-1 Forced CVF ON

Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, make the setting.

CS Function MD ADDR DT

Forced CVF ON 1) Make the setting shown at right. 1 10 ST 0017 10 Start of setting

2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Completion of setting


STEP PROCEDUREMONITOR

Adjustment points and range


CVF Frequency 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0002 "ADJ" Start of setting

Adjustment 2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ADJ Completion of setting



Adjustment points and range

5-6-2 CVF Frequency Adjustment

M. EQ. Frequency counter

TP. Extension connector - pin 2 (EVF HD)

SPEC. 15.625 ± 0.1kHz

Preparation)

(1) Carry out adjustment according to the table shown below.


27

5-6-3 Contrast Adjustment

MODE Card playback of monochrome master (still picture)

M. EQ. Oscilloscope

TP/TRIG. Extension connector - pin 23 (G), pin 21 (R), pin 24 (B), / VIDEO OUT

SPEC. 2.20 ± 0.05 [V]

Procedure)

(1) According to the table shown below, carry out adjustment in

the card playback mode of the monochrome master.


Contrast Adjustment (G) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0003 "ADJ" Start of setting

2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ADJ Completion of setting


Contrast Adjustment (R) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0004 "ADJ" Start of setting



Contrast Adjustment (B) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0005 "ADJ" Start of setting




Microcomputer operation

Fig. 19

2.20V ± 0.05V


28

5-6-4 Brightness Adjustment


M. EQ. Oscilloscope

TP/TRIG. Extension connector - pin 23 (G), pin 21 (R), pin 24 (B), / VIDEO OUT

SPEC. 2.60 ± 0.05 [V]

Procedure)



Fig. 20

2.60V ± 0.05V


Brightness Adjustment (G) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0006 "ADJ" Start of setting



Brightness Adjustment (R) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0007 "ADJ" Start of setting



Brightness Adjustment (B) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0008 "ADJ" Start of setting






29

5-6-5 Black Limiter Level Adjustment


M. EQ. Oscilloscope

TP/TRIG. Extension connector - pin 23 (EVF G) / VIDEO OUT

SPEC. 4.45 ± 0.05 [V]

Procedure)



Fig. 21

4.45V ± 0.05V


Black Limiter Level 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 RD 0006 Original value Record the original value.

Adjustment 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0006 00 Setting of 00

2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ (press the PAUSE button.)

3) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0009 "ADJ" Start of setting



5) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0006 Original value Reset to the recorded

original value.





30

5-6-6 COM Amplitude Adjustment


M. EQ. Oscilloscope

TP/TRIG. Extension connector - pin 22 (EVF COM) / VIDEO OUT

SPEC. 3.50 ± 0.05 [V]

Procedure)




COM Amplitude 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 000B "ADJ" Start of setting

Adjustment 2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ADJ Completion of setting




Fig. 22

3.50V ± 0.05V


31

5-6-7 COM-DC Level Adjustment


M. EQ. Oscilloscope

TP/TRIG. Extension connector - pin 22 (EVF COM) / VIDEO OUT

SPEC. 3.20 ± 0.05 [V] (DC. P-P center of EVF COM to GND level)

Procedure)



Fig. 23

3.20V ± 0.05V


COM-DC Level 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 000A "ADJ" Start of setting

Ajustment 2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ADJ Completion of setting





32

5-6-8 Flash Memory Writing

SPEC. Automatic Writing

Procedure)

(1) Write adjustment data (5-6-2 to 7) into the flash memory according the table shown below.

Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, Flash Memory writing.

5-6-9 Release of Forced CVF ON

Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table shown below, make the setting.


Release of Forced 1) Make the setting shown at right. 1 10 ST 0017 00 Start of setting

CVF ON 2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ Completion of setting





1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 09 ST 0081 00 Flash Memory Writing

2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ (press the PAUSE button.)




33

5-7 Color Balance Check

Preparation)

(1) Carry out this correction in the product state.

(2) Adjustment Conditions

Program AE : AUTO

AF : OFF


Digital zoom : OFF

CHART Lightbox (5600°K), and color bar chart

M.EQ. Vectorscope

TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT

SPEC. R : × 1.75 98° (± 0.15, ±5°), Ye : × 0.9 175° (± 0.15, ±5°)

Procedure)

(1) Quit the service mode, and turn power OFF/ON.

(2) Perform light-box recording, and carry out WB SET using the relevant function of the product.

(3) Take an image of the color bar chart, and check that the levels of R, Ye and G are within the specified ranges respectively.

(4) If the result of the above check is NG, carry out camera section adjustment again.


34

5-8 Recorder Section Adjustment

Note)

(1) Each of the adjustment data (5-8-1 to 5-8-3) becomes valid when 5-8-5 flash memory writing is made. When turning power OFF/

ON during each adjustment, be sure to carry out 5-8-5 flash memory writing.

Preparation)

(1) Except for the tape-path adjustment, carry out adjustment in the product state.

5-8-0 LCD PCB Setting Destination

When mounting the LCD P.C.B of service part, perform the following adjustment.

5-8-1 SWP Adjustment

MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1381-000)


Procedure)

(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out SWP automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.


C.FG(AUTO) CS Function MD ADDR DT


2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ Automatic adjustment is in progress.

(press the PAUSE button.) RD Automatic adjustment is completed.

5-8-2 C. FG Adjustment

MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1381-000)


Procedure)

(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out C.FG automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.


SWP (AUTO) CS Function MD ADDR DT







2) Add "09" to the current value, and

store the result data. RD ADJ


35

5-8-3 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG

MODE Stop without VTR cassette

Procedure)

(1) Carry out reel FG adjustment according to the following table.






5-8-4 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment

MODE During camera recording in product condition (AF : OFF, LCD PANEL : ON)

SPEC. Power supply voltage: 5.85 ± 0.02 [V]

Note)

(1) Perform the adjustment after 4sec of recording start.

(2) In step 1 - 2), after completion of storing, "ST" remains indicated or "WR" is indicated momentarily and then "ST" is indicated

again without returning to "RD". Be sure to check in step 2 that the adjustment has been completed.

Procedure)

(1) Under the above condition, set a power supply voltage to 5.85 ± 0.02[V].

(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out battery voltage drop adjustment.

5-8-5 Flash Memory Writing

SPEC. Memory data writing

Procedure)

(1) Write adjustment data (5-8-1 to 4) into the flash memory according the table shown below.






MONITOR


BATTERY VOLTAGE DROP. CS Function MD ADDR DT


2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ (press the PAUSE button.) Adjustment is completed.

2 Check if the value of DT is updated on DT2 during STORE.


36

5-9 Tape Path Adjustment

Note)

(1) For tape path adjustment, the service mode setting is necessary. For the details of setting procedure, refer to the DMC III Section.

Preparation)

(1) For tape path adjustment, make the recorder adjustment setting (P. 2, 3).

Procedure)

(1) Referring to the table given below (STEPS 1, 2, 3), play back the tracking master (DY9-1345-000) for tape path adjustment.

At STEP 2, perform tracking shift by adjusting DT in a range of F0 to FF so that the RF envelope will be 70%.

(2) After adjustment, restore tracking shift setting to normal according to the following table (STEPS 4 : P.OFF).


TRACKING TAPE CS Function MD ADDR DT

1 1) Play back the tracking tape.

2 1) Set up tracking shift .

2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 00 ST 9FE7 F2


3) Perform 70% tracking shift by ↑ ↑ ST ↑ F0~FF The amount of tracking shift is changed.

adjusting DT in a range of F0 to FF.


* Tracking shift released in DT00.

3 1) Perform tape path adjustment with the RF envelope in 70% tracking shift state.

4 1) Select the normal mode.

2) Turn off power to the main unit.

MONITOR


37

R-Y

BURST

B-Y

PAL

R

Ye

Copy the chart on a transparent film. Trim and attach the transparent chart on a vectorscope display.

Color balance adjustment chartMVX250i E, MVX200 E, MV200i E

MVX250i E, MVX200 E, MV200i E

Color balance check chart

R-Y

R

Ye

BURST

B-Y

PAL

SERVICE HINTS

CONTENTS

1. Service Hints -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1

1-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1

1-2 Location of Main Elements ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2

1-3 Current Consumption Check ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4

2. Trouble Shooting --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5

2-1 Power Supply ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5

2-2 Camera Picture Faulty ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6

2-3 Faulty of Playback Picture -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7

2-4 Startup Window Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

2-5 Short cut demonstration mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 ESERVICE HINTS

1

1. Service Hints

1-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards

The printed circuit boards are arranged as shown below.

Fig. 1

OPERATION KEY

CVF P.C.B.

JACK1 P.C.B.

JACK2 P.C.B.

CCD P.C.B.

MAIN P.C.B.

LCD P.C.B.

CAV P.C.B.

R-KEY P.C.B.


2

1-2 Location of Main Elements

Fig. 2

IC2302SDRAM

IC1102SDRAM

IC1103DIGIC DV

IC2301VIC4

IC2000VRP2

MAIN P.C.B.

FU1810

FU3202

FU3201

FU3205

FU3203

IC3201DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL

IC100MODE MI-COM

IC102BACKUP

IC300OPE AMP

IC301MOTOR DRIVE

IC1810CHARGE IC

IC1811OPE AMP

IC32034.7V REGULATOR

IC2300FLASH

IC1101SDRAM


3

Fig. 3

CAV P.C.B.

LCD P.C.B.

JACK1 P.C.B. CCD P.C.B.

IC10042.8V REGULATOR

IC1001INVERTER

IC1002TG/CDS/AGC/AD/V-DRIVER

IC801AUDIO INTERFACE

IC1501EVF DRIVER

IC1200LENS DRIVE

IC4201DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL

IC901EEPROM

IC902LCD DRIVE

IC1602SENSOR GYRO

IC1601SENSOR GYRO

IC1070CCD


4

1-3 Current Consumption Check

The following table shows the specified value of current consumption in each status.

Measurement condition : Product status, camera auto mode(AF OFF), LCD ON (Approx. 0.1A each smaller in case of CVF)

Preset voltage : 7.4V

POWER SW MODE Current consumption (A)

CAMERA REC PAUSE 0.43

REC 0.47

VCR STOP 0.29

PLAY 0.37

POWER OFF 0.6 (mA)


5

2. Trouble ShootingTo detect the failure part for repair, if any, use the following hints and check points.

2-1 Power Supply

<Hints>

When the power source is attached, the unit enters the standby mode in the following sequences.

Main power is connected. → UNREG is supplied to the MAIN P.C.B. → MODE MI-COM starts up. → MODE MI-COM outputs VCR

ON “H” signal. → PWM driver starts up and turns on each power supply. → Establishes communication with the FR MI-COM. → FR

MI-COM initializes recorder mechanical chassis. → After initialized, the MODE MI-COM is brought into the standby status with the

VCR ON changed to VCR Low.

After that, the power supply is turned ON by the following procedures.

Power supply mode switch operation → After MODE MI-COM is accepted, VCR ON “H” is output. → The PWM driver is started to

turn on various power supplies. → The FR MI-COM is started to control the system.

<Check Points>

1) Key Inputs

Check the key inputs at Powe r Switch in the SERVICE mode.

2) Check of microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication

If the microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication line is normal, the version number of each microcomputer can be indi-

cated in the service mode. Otherwise, the communication line or microcomputer may be faulty.

3) Error in Mechanism (“SERVICE MODE · ADJUSTMENT” P. 9)

If any error is occurred by mechanism trouble at initializing, the error can be detected.

At this state, the power can be turned on, but the unit enters “ERROR STOP” state. In this case, check the error data in the

SERVICE mode.

4) VCR O N “H”, CAM ON “H” (control signal from MODE MI-COM) Outputs

Check the output of control signal.

5) Fuses on the POWER SUPPLY P.C.B.

Check the continuity of the fuses FU3201, 3202, 3203, 3205 and 1801 on the MAIN P.C.B. In case of NG, replace the fuse and

check the power consumption.

6) Replace the MAIN P.C.B. with a service part and check the operation.


6

2-2 Camera Picture Faulty

<Hints>

A flow of camera picture (EE) is as below.

CCD → CAV P.C.B. → MAIN P.C.B. (DIGIC DV → VIC4) → JACK1 / JACK2 P.C.B.

<Check Points>

1) Check of lens reset (“SERVICE MODE · ADJUSTMENT” P.11)

If no camera picture appears, check if the lens has been reset by means of the service mode. In case of NG, check the lens.

2) Check of blue back output

If the blue back is confirmed, the signal line subsequent to VIC4 is considered to be OK.

3) Check of DIGIC DV generation signal (white 100% or color bar) (“SERVICE MODE · ADJUSTMENT” P.10)

The white 100% or color bar signals are generated by the DIGIC DV on the MAIN P.C.B. In the service mode, if the output of the

white 100% or color bar signal is attained, the signal line subsequent to DIGIC DV is considered to be OK.

4) Check of CCD output

The CCD output is sampled by IC1002 (TG/CDS/AGC/AD/V-DRIVER). Check the signal.

5) Check by command particular to camera (“SERVICE MODE · ADJUSTMENT” P.10)

Check the operation of White balance, AGC, IRIS, etc. in the service mode.


7

2-3 Faulty of Playback Picture

<Hints>

In the DV, degradation of picture quality normally appears on the screen as block noise. This is because, if an error occurs exceeding the

ability of the error correction circuit, the block by block information of pictures is not played back properly and thus complemented by

the previous picture information. Normally, such block noise appears on the screen when the error rate has considerably been degraded

due to the degraded tape or the lowered head output, etc. Be sure to check the playback picture quality by the error rate.

<Check Points>

1) Deterioration of Tape Quality

Check if flaws, kinks, etc. are found on a magnetic face of tape or not, and compare it with the error rate of other unit.

2) Error Rate (“SERVICE MODE · ADJUSTMENT” P. 8)

In the service mode, check an error rate of self-recording/LP playback. The specified allowable error rate is 2 × 10-5.

In case of NG, take the following procedure.

(1) Observe a playback envelope. If it is abnormal, carry out tape-path adjustment.

(2) Run a cleaning tape.

Use the cleaning tape of hard type (DY9-1384-000).

[Playback time]

After replacement of the drum unit → 25 seconds

For cleaning → 25 seconds per time

* Do not proceed to a playback for 25 seconds or more continuously.

* Limit the total of playback time to five minutes.

* When using hard-type cleaning tape, select the cleaning mode on the product main unit.

(Refer to “SERVICE MODE · ADJUSTMENT” [4-3 - Cleaning Mode] P.10)

(3) Check the error rate again.

If the error rate is out of the specified range, clean the tape drive parts (posts, drum) using cleaning paper moistened with

alcohol.

* Take care not to damage the head.

* Do not touch the head with bare hand.


If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the tape with a new one and check the error rate again. At this step, use a

tape (must be Panasonic LP tape) which has been purchased at a different time. The error rate may become worse due to

inconsistent quality or aging of the tape.


If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the drum unit.


If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the mechanical unit.


8

2-4 Startup Window Setting

When user’s original data are written over the initial default data of the start-up image or the sound, shutter, operation or self-timer

[User Setting] , the user’s original data become a default data (replace the initial default data) after replacement of the MAIN P.C.B.

Note that the data thus written by the user is recognized as a non-original data. To avoid this, follow the next procedure.

Procedure)

How to save an original data to a PC and write it to the main unit:

(1) In the MyCamera window on the Zoom Browser EX, save original image data to a PC.

(2) Replace the MAIN P.C.B.

(3) In the MyCamera window, set the original image data saved at step (1) to the camera.

For details, refer to the DIGITAL VIDEO SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL - “Customizing Your Camcorder with

the MyCamera Settings”.

Note)

Only where the USB I/F is available for connection between the PC and main unit, it is allowed to save/write original data using the

Zoom Browser EX.


9

2-5 Short cut demonstration mode

As a function destined to shop salesman, the Image stabilizer and white LED can easily be turned ON/OFF. Also, the screen

indicates the version of firmware.

<Operation procedure>

1. Start the operation in the camera mode or card camera mode, and take out the cassette and memory card.

2. Set the Program selector to “ P ”.

3. While holding down the Select/Set button, press the MENU button for at least two seconds with the P.AE mode selection screen

(Fig. 4) displayed. Release the MENU button only.

4. Releasing the MENU button displays the short cut demonstration screen (Fig. 5).

5. Operate the Selector dial to change different settings.

Note : The magenta indication items cannot be selected.

ex) IS setting in card camera mode.

6. Press the MENU button or select “CLOSE” on the screen to exit.

Fig. 4

P.AE mode selection screen

Fig. 5

Short cut demonstration screen

PARTS LIST

CONTENTS

EXPLODED VIEWS

Casing Parts Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2

Front Cover Unit Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4

Left Cover Unit Section ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6

Right Cover Unit Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8

LCD Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10

Rear Cover Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12

Recorder Unit Section-1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14

Recorder Unit Section-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16

CVF Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18

Camera Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 20

Lens Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22

Mechanical Chassis Section-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24




Accessory Section-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32

Accessory Section-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34

FUSE Replacement Instruction ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 36

ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37

PARTS LIST --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38

1

1. Especially critical parts in the power circuit block should not be replaced with other marks.

Critical parts are marked with in this electrical parts list.

2. For continued protection against risk of fire, replace FU3201, FU3202, FU3205 only with same TYPE

: 0435001 1.0-24V FUSE Replace FU3203, FU1810 only with same TYPE : 043501.5 1.5-24V FUSE

Manufacturer : Littel FUSE

CAUTION

2

MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 EPARTS LIST

Casing Parts Section

Rear Cover Unit

Left Cover Unit

Rigt Cover/LCD UnitFront Cover Unit

Camera/Lens/CVF/Recorder Unit

9×2

14

6×3

5

15

11

9

12

13

1111×3

611

6×3

9

12

10

4

3

2

1×4

7

8

3

MECHANICAL PARTS

SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS


1 XA1-3170-507 000 F 4 SCREW2 DA2-0436-000 000 C 1 SHOE, ACCESSARY3 DA3-1447-000 000 C 1 COVER, ACC SHOE MVX250i E NEW

DA3-1548-000 000 C 1 COVER, ACC SHOE MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW4 DF1-5078-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, TOP NEW

5 XA1-7170-507 000 F 1 SCREW6 XA1-7170-357 000 F 7 SCREW7 D52-0260-000 000 B 1 CAP, LENS NEW8 XA1-7170-557 000 F 1 SCREW9 XA1-7170-257 000 F 4 SCREW

10 XA1-7170-207 000 F 1 SCREW11 XA1-7170-307 000 F 6 SCREW12 XA4-9170-407 000 F 2 SCREW13 XA4-9170-607 000 F 1 SCREW14 XA4-9170-507 000 F 1 SCREW

15 DA3-1439-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, LI BATT NEW

4


Front Cover Unit Section

11×3

11×3

9

12

14

1311

10

20

19

184

76

58

1716

15

21

3

2

1

*1

*1 : MVX250i E ONLY

5

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 DA3-1526-000 000 B 1 COVER, JACK2 MVX250i E NEWDA3-1532-000 000 B 1 COVER, JACK2 C MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW

2 DY1-8651-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, JACK2 NEW3 DA3-1470-000 000 B 1 PANEL, FRONT MVX250i E NEW

DA3-1531-000 000 B 1 PANEL, FRONT MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW

4 DY1-8658-000 000 B 1 RING ASS’Y, LENS MVX250i E NEWDY1-8660-000 000 B 1 RING ASS’Y, LENS MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW

5 DY1-8650-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, JACK1 MVX250i E NEWDY1-8673-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, JACK1 MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW

6 DA3-1469-000 000 B 1 PLATE, MEGA PIXEL NEW

7 DA3-1456-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, LENS NEW8 DA3-1588-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, LED W LAY CUT MVX250i E NEW9 DG3-0401-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, JACK1 MVX250i E NEW

DG3-0418-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, JACK1 MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW10 XA4-9170-407 000 F 1 SCREW

11 XA4-9170-507 000 F 7 SCREW12 DA3-1465-000 000 C 1 CHARGE LED NEW13 DA3-1568-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, LED LAY CUT NEW14 XA1-7170-357 000 F 1 SCREW15 DA3-1460-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MIC NEW

16 DA3-1462-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, MIC NEW17 DF1-5058-000 000 C 1 MIC ASS’Y NEW18 DA3-1461-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, MIC NEW19 DA3-1463-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MIC NEW20 DY1-8682-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, FRONT MVX250i E NEW

DY1-8683-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, FRONT MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW21 DA3-1602-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, FRONT NEW

6


Left Cover Unit Section

1×21×2

9

10

12

18

16

24

1

22

23

15

17

13

14

16

54

2

3

7

8

19

23×4

21

11

20

25

7

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 XA1-7170-307 000 F 6 SCREW2 DA3-1472-000 000 B 1 COVER, CASSETE NEW3 WR1-5090-000 000 C 1 SPEAKER4 DA3-1489-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, SPEAKER NEW5 DH2-5206-000 000 C 1 FPC, SPEAKER NEW

6 DA3-1485-000 000 B 1 COVER, REGULATION NEW7 DA3-1593-000 000 C 1 TAPE, GND NEW8 DA3-1484-000 000 C 1 HOOK, F GRIP NEW9 DA3-1486-000 000 B 1 COVER, ZOOM TOP NEW

10 DA3-1488-000 000 B 1 TAPE, ZOOM TOP COVER NEW

11 DA3-1592-000 000 C 1 TAPE, ZOOM TOP COVER2 NEW12 DG3-0408-000 000 B 1 ZOOM PHOTO ASS’Y MVX250i E NEW

DG3-0432-000 000 B 1 ZOOM PHOTO ASS’Y MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW13 DA3-1471-000 000 B 1 COVER, LEFT NEW14 DA3-1601-000 000 C 1 TAPE,LB GND NEW

15 DA3-1483-000 000 C 1 LOCK, GRIP PIN NEW16 DA3-1482-000 000 C 1 KNOB, CASSETTE OPEN NEW17 DA3-1481-000 000 C 1 SPRING, CASSETTE HOOK NEW18 DA3-1477-000 000 C 1 SPRING, CASSETTE CLICK NEW19 DA3-1603-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, L COVER NEW

20 XA1-7170-357 000 F 1 SCREW21 DF1-5064-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, CASSETTE NEW22 DA3-1574-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, LEFT COVER NEW23 XA4-9170-459 000 F 5 SCREW24 DA3-1487-000 000 C 1 SHEET, CASSETTE ARM NEW

25 DA3-1595-000 000 C 1 LABEL, CAUTION MVX250i E NEWDA3-1597-000 000 C 1 LABEL, CAUTION MVX200i E NEWDA3-1596-000 000 C 1 LABEL, CAUTION MVX200 E NEW

8


Right Cover Unit Section

LCD UNIT

1×2

4

2

7

1

3

1

5

11

98

13

12

10

6

A

A

14

9

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 XA4-9170-507 000 F 4 SCREW2 DA3-1437-000 000 C 1 COVER, HINGE NEW3 DA3-1611-000 000 C 1 LABEL, HOLD NEW4 XA4-9170-407 000 F 1 SCREW5 DA3-1440-000 000 C 1 CASE, LITHIUM NEW

6 DG3-0403-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, KEY NEW7 DA3-1443-000 000 C 1 BASE, TRIPOD NEW8 DA3-1445-000 000 C 1 HOOK, CARD COVER NEW9 DY1-8656-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, RIGHT MVX250i E NEW

DY1-8657-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, RIGHT MVX200i E NEW

DY1-8681-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, RIGHT MVX200 E NEW10 DA3-1435-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, ACCESS LED LIGHT NEW11 DA3-1438-000 000 C 1 SHEET, BLINDFOLD MVX250i E NEW

DA3-1571-000 000 B 1 SHEET, BLINDFOLD BLUE MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW12 DA3-1442-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, CARD COVER NEW

13 DA3-1436-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD NEW14 DA3-1610-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION NEW

10


LCD Unit Section

5×4

1×2

2

3

6

7

8

9

10

11

18

12

14

13

15 16 17

4

11

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 XA1-7170-407 000 F 2 SCREW2 DA3-1508-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP MVX250i E NEW

DA3-1552-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP MVX200i E NEWDA3-1534-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP MVX200 E NEW

3 DG3-0400-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LCD NEW

4 DA3-1503-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LCD NEW5 DA3-1607-000 000 C 4 SHEET, LCD2 NEW6 DG3-0404-000 000 C 1 BACK LIGHT ASS’Y, LCD NEW

*1 7 DY1-8670-000 000 B 1 LCD ASS’Y(SELECTION) NEW*2 WG2-5272-000 000 B 1 LCD ASS’Y NEW

8 DA3-1502-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM MVX250i E NEWDA3-1510-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW

9 DA3-1569-000 000 C 1 SPRING, LCD LOCK NEW10 DA3-1506-000 000 B 1 KNOB, LCD OPEN NEW11 DA2-0909-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, LCD LOCK

12 DA3-1504-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HINGE TOP MVX250i E NEWDA3-1544-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HINGE TOP MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW

13 DA2-1737-000 000 1 MAGNET, HINJI14 DG3-0406-000 000 C 1 HINGE, LCD NEW15 DH2-5205-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD-KEY NEW

16 DA3-1505-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HINGE BOTTOM NEW17 XA4-9170-907 000 F 1 SCREW NEW18 DG3-0419-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD DETECT NEW

*1 : Free from the pixel dot.

*2 : Same quality as the production line.

12


Rear Cover Unit Section

13×3

3×2

1

6

5

4

2

3

7

3

1112

38

910

14

13

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 DA3-1500-000 000 C 1 BELT, GRIP NEW2 XA4-9170-357 000 F 1 SCREW3 XA4-9170-457 000 F 5 SCREW4 DA3-1490-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GRIP BELT NEW5 DA3-1499-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, GRIP BELT NEW

6 XA4-9170-557 000 F 1 SCREW7 DG3-0409-000 000 B 1 SWITCH ASS’Y,POWER NEW8 DA3-1497-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, EJECT NEW9 DA3-1498-000 000 C 1 SPRING, EJECT NEW

10 DA3-1492-000 000 C 1 KNOB, BATTERY EJECT NEW

11 DA3-1495-000 000 C 1 PLATE, STRAP NEW12 DA3-1491-000 000 B 1 COVER, REAR NEW13 XA4-9170-407 000 F 3 SCREW14 DF1-5059-000 000 C 1 TERMINAL ASS’Y, BATTERY NEW

14


Recorder Unit Section-1

A

A1

2 34

6

54

7

7

Camera/Lens/Recorder Unit

CVF Unit

4 *1

*1

*1 : MVX250i E ONLY

15

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 DH2-5175-000 000 C 1 FPC, ACS-MAIN MVX250i E NEW2 DG3-0410-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR ASS’Y, SHOE MVX250i E NEW3 XA1-7170-357 000 F 1 SCREW4 XA1-7170-257 000 F 3 SCREW5 DA3-1604-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, RC1 NEW

6 DA3-1605-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, RC2 NEW7 XA1-7170-207 000 F 2 SCREW

16


Recorder Unit Section-2Camera/Lens Unit

A

A

9×38

7×32×3

4×2

5×2

2×2

12

15

16

13

22

21

17

18

20

19

23

14

10

5

3

1

4

24

11

6

17

MECHANICAL PARTS



<Caution> 1 DY1-8609-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT, DMCIII2 XA1-7170-257 000 F 5 SCREW3 DG3-0402-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, JACK2 NEW4 DA3-1026-000 000 F 3 SCREW5 DA3-1429-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, HOLDER NEW

6 DF1-5075-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, RECORDER NEW7 XA9-1167-000 000 F 3 SCREW8 DA2-0314-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE9 DA3-0941-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, INSULATION

10 DA3-1426-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, SUB NEW

11 DA3-1591-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, SHIELDING FOAM NEW12 DA3-0161-000 000 C 1 SHIELD CASE, HA13 DA3-1428-000 000 C 1 SHIELD CASE, PM2 NEW14 DA3-1609-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, CCD CORE NEW15 DH2-5174-000 000 C 1 FPC, MAIN-JACK2 NEW

16 DH2-5173-000 000 C 1 FPC, MAIN-JACK1 NEW17 WE8-6147-000 000 C 1 CORE, FERRITE NEW18 DH2-5204-000 000 C 1 FPC, CAV-JACK1 NEW19 DH2-5209-000 000 C 1 CABLE, MAIN-JACK1 NEW20 DG3-0398-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CAV NEW

21 DH2-5172-000 000 C 1 FPC, MAIN-KEY NEW22 DA3-1427-000 000 C 1 SHIELD CASE, PM1 NEW23 DY1-8645-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN MVX250i E NEW

DY1-8648-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN MVX200i E NEWDY1-8649-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN MVX200 E NEW

24 XA1-7170-207 000 F 1 SCREW

<Caution> : When using this part on the product, replace the Housing Cover with the

DA3-2345-000 (Symbol No.10, page 25).

18


CVF Unit Section

3×2

3×2

12

7

4

65

23

24

89

1011

12

13

17

18

19

21

22

1415

16

20

19

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 DA3-1517-000 000 B 1 COVER, DUST NEW2 DA3-1511-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF TOP NEW3 XA1-7170-257 000 F 4 SCREW4 DG3-0407-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASS’Y, CVF NEW5 DA3-1518-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF CLICK NEW

6 DH2-5203-000 000 C 1 FPC, CVF-CAV NEW7 DG3-0405-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CVF NEW8 DA3-1521-000 000 C 1 REFLECTOR, CVF NEW9 DA3-1523-000 000 C 1 DIFFUSER, CVF NEW

10 DA3-1522-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, CVF PANEL NEW

11 WG2-5241-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y, CVF12 DA3-2318-000 000 C 1 MASK, CVF NEW13 DY1-8678-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, CVF INNER TOP NEW14 YN1-3090-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYEPIECE 1 NEW15 DA3-1516-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CVF LENS NEW

16 YN1-3093-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYEPIECE 2 NEW17 DA3-1076-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, CVF KNOB18 DA3-1520-000 000 C 1 KNOB, CVF NEW19 XA9-1166-000 000 F 1 SCREW20 DY1-8703-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, CVF INNER BOTTOM NEW

21 DA3-1071-000 000 C 1 SPRING, CVF CLICK22 XA4-9170-407 000 F 1 SCREW23 DA3-1512-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF BOTTOM NEW24 DA3-1524-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, FPC NEW

20


Camera Unit Section

LENS UNIT

6×2

1

2

7

4

3

5

21

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 DH9-3009-000 000 B 1 FILTER, IR NEW2 DA3-1424-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION NEW3 DY1-8671-000 000 C 1 CCD ASS’Y NEW4 DH2-5176-000 000 C 1 FPC, CCD-CAV NEW5 DG3-0399-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CCD NEW

6 XA4-9170-507 000 F 2 SCREW7 WE8-6201-000 000 C 1 CORE, FERRITE NEW

22


Lens Unit Section

2×2

4×2

5

2

3

3

1

23

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 DG3-0715-000 000 C 1 LENS ASS’Y NEW2 XA4-9170-457 000 F 3 SCREW NEW3 XA4-9170-357 000 F 2 SCREW4 XA4-5170-457 000 F 2 SCREW5 YH8-2015-000 000 C 1 IG METER ASS’Y NEW

24

DMC IIIPARTS LIST

1

(10)

3

9

5

7

8

6

4

2

3×3

Mechanical Chassis Section-1

25

MECHANICAL PARTS


DMC IIIPARTS LIST

<Caution> 1 DG1-4506-000 000 B 1 COMPARTMENT ASS’Y, CASSETTE2 XA1-7140-147 000 C 1 SCREW3 DA2-2138-000 000 C 4 SCREW4 DY1-8500-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y NEW5 DA2-2139-000 000 C 1 WASHER

6 DF1-1703-000 000 C 1 IDLER ASS’Y7 DA2-2116-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (DRUM)8 DA2-2115-000 000 C 1 SCREW9 DY1-8501-000 000 B 1 CHASSIS ASS’Y, SLIDE

10 DA3-2345-000 000 C 1 COVER, HOUSING NEW

<Caution> : When using this part on the product, replace the Housing Cover with the

DA3-2345-000 (Symbol No.10).

26

DMC IIIPARTS LIST

123

4

5

6

7

8

6

1

9

10

13

11

12


27

MECHANICAL PARTS


DMC IIIPARTS LIST

1 DA2-0645-000 000 C 2 WASHER2 DG1-4504-000 000 C 1 REEL ASS’Y, S3 DS1-0193-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (TENSION)4 DF1-1693-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASS’Y, TENSION5 DF1-1694-000 000 C 1 RELEASE ASS’Y, TENSION

6 DA2-2139-000 000 C 2 WASHER7 DF1-1704-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASS’Y, S8 DS1-0199-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (S BRAKE)9 DG1-4505-000 000 C 1 REEL ASS’Y, T

10 DA2-2220-000 000 C 1 LEVER, EJECT

11 DA2-2238-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, MAIN T12 DS1-0198-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (T BRAKE)13 DF1-1695-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASS’Y

28

DMC IIIPARTS LIST

2×2

2×2

2×3

38

9

210

11

12

13

(4)

(6)

(14)

(7)

(5)1


29

MECHANICAL PARTS


DMC IIIPARTS LIST

1 DG1-4502-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASS’Y, LOADING2 DA2-2261-000 000 C 8 SCREW3 DG1-4497-010 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL ASS’Y4 DF1-1687-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE S5 DF1-1688-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE T

6 DA2-0780-000 000 C 1 SCREW7 DF1-1686-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y8 DA2-2259-000 000 C 1 SCREW9 DG1-4503-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASS’Y, CAPSTAN

10 XA1-7140-147 000 C 1 SCREW

11 DG1-4500-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, PINCH12 DA2-2139-000 000 C 1 WASHER13 DS1-0192-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (PINCH)14 DA2-2128-000 000 C 1 S LOADING GEAR

30

DMC IIIPARTS LIST

1

3

4

5

8

9

6

10

7

2

11


31

MECHANICAL PARTS


DMC IIIPARTS LIST

1 DA2-2191-000 000 C 1 LEVER, CAM2 XA1-7140-147 000 C 1 SCREW3 DA2-2196-000 000 C 1 BELT, TIMING4 DA2-2197-000 000 C 1 GEAR, PULLEY5 DA2-2190-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CONNECT

6 DA2-2140-000 000 C 1 WASHER7 DA2-2188-000 000 C 1 GEAR, WHEEL8 DA2-2139-000 000 C 1 WASHER9 DA2-2195-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAPSTAN

10 DG1-4501-000 000 C 1 CHASSIS ASS’Y, MAIN

11 DA2-2192-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, TENSION CAM

32


Accessory Section-1

3

4SDC-8M

N.S. (Commercially available.Make copy sample pictures if necessary.) N.S. (Product available)

N.S. (Product available)

N.S. (Product available)CB-2LT

CBC-NB2

WL-D83(E,P) NB-2L/NB-2LH/

BP-2L12/BP-2L14

PLUG TYPE

AJPN

E

BAS

2

1

CA-570N.S. (Product available)

(5)(6)

33

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 DY1-8531-000 000 C 1 DC CABLE2 D82-0643-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(E) PLUG TYPE E

D82-0645-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(AS) PLUG TYPE AS3 CD1-4054-010 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL NB-2L NEW4 D83-0682-000 000 B 1 WL-D83 WIRELESS CONTROLLER(E) MVX250i E, NEW

MVX200i ED83-0683-000 000 B 1 WL-D83 WIRELESS CONTROLLER(PAL)MVX200 E NEW

5 DY1-8528-000 000 C 1 COVER, BATTERY6 DY1-8530-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLER(E) MVX250i E,

MVX200i E

DY1-8674-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLER(PAL) MVX200 E NEW

34


Accessory Section-2

5SS-900

WD-H34 TL-H34N.S. (Product available)N.S. (Product available)

3

4

3

2

N.S. (Product available)

FS-34UN.S. (Product available)

IFC-300PCU

1WIDE ATTACHMENT WA-34

MVX250i ONLY

35

MECHANICAL PARTS



1 D55-0240-000 000 B 1 WIDE ATTACHMENT MVX250i E NEW2 DA3-2340-000 000 B 1 CAP, FRONT NEW3 DA3-2338-000 000 B 1 CAP, REAR NEW4 DA3-2337-000 000 B 1 CAP, FRONT NEW5 D81-1470-000 000 B 1 STRAP, SHOULDER SS900

36


CAUTION - FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE FU3201, FU3202,

FU3205 ONLY WITH SAME TYPE: 0435001 1.0-24V FUSE REPLACE FU3203, FU1810

ONLY WITH SAME TYPE: 043501.5 1.5-24V FUSE MANUFACTURER: LITTELFUSE

MAIN P.C.B.

IC3201

IC301IC300

IC100

IC102

IC103

FU1810

FU3202

FU3201

FU3205

FU3203

FUSE Replacement Instruction

37

ELECTRICAL PARTS



MAIN P.C.BCN2102 VS1-7098-021 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 21PFU1810 VD7-2871-501 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE NEWFU3201 VD7-2871-001 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE NEWFU3202 VD7-2871-001 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE NEW

FU3203 VD7-2871-501 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE NEWFU3205 VD7-2871-001 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE NEW

JACK1 P.C.B.CN41 WS1-5716-000 000 C 1 JACK, MIC MVX250i E

CN81 WS1-5524-000 000 C 1 JACK, MINI AVCN3212 WS1-6113-000 000 C 1 JACK, DCCN3551 WS1-6247-000 000 C 1 JACK, USB NEW

JACK2 P.C.B.

CN11 WS1-6347-000 000 C 1 JACK, DV NEWCN31 WS1-6263-000 000 C 1 JACK, S-VIDEO NEWCN91 VS1-7098-021 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 21P

LCD P.C.B.

CN901 VS1-6596-027 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 27P

38

PARTS LIST

PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS


33 CD1-4054-010 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL NB-2L NEW3 D52-0260-000 000 B 1 CAP, LENS NEW

35 D55-0240-000 000 B 1 WIDE ATTACHMENT MVX250i E NEW35 D81-1470-000 000 B 1 STRAP, SHOULDER SS90033 D82-0643-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(E) PLUG TYPE E

33 D82-0645-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(AS) PLUG TYPE AS33 D83-0682-000 000 B 1 WL-D83 WIRELESS CONTROLLER(E)

MVX250i E, MVX200i E NEW33 D83-0683-000 000 B 1 WL-D83 WIRELESS CONTROLLER(PAL)

MVX200 E NEW

17 DA2-0314-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE3 DA2-0436-000 000 C 1 SHOE, ACCESSARY

27 DA2-0645-000 000 C 2 WASHER29 DA2-0780-000 000 C 1 SCREW11 DA2-0909-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, LCD LOCK

11 DA2-1737-000 000 1 MAGNET, HINJI25 DA2-2115-000 000 C 1 SCREW25 DA2-2116-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (DRUM)29 DA2-2128-000 000 C 1 S LOADING GEAR25 DA2-2138-000 000 C 4 SCREW

25,27,29,31 DA2-2139-000 000 C 5 WASHER31 DA2-2140-000 000 C 1 WASHER31 DA2-2188-000 000 C 1 GEAR, WHEEL31 DA2-2190-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CONNECT31 DA2-2191-000 000 C 1 LEVER, CAM

31 DA2-2192-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, TENSION CAM31 DA2-2195-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAPSTAN31 DA2-2196-000 000 C 1 BELT, TIMING31 DA2-2197-000 000 C 1 GEAR, PULLEY27 DA2-2220-000 000 C 1 LEVER, EJECT

27 DA2-2238-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, MAIN T29 DA2-2259-000 000 C 1 SCREW29 DA2-2261-000 000 C 8 SCREW17 DA3-0161-000 000 C 1 SHIELD CASE, HA17 DA3-0941-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, INSULATION

17 DA3-1026-000 000 F 3 SCREW19 DA3-1071-000 000 C 1 SPRING, CVF CLICK19 DA3-1076-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, CVF KNOB21 DA3-1424-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION NEW17 DA3-1426-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, SUB NEW

17 DA3-1427-000 000 C 1 SHIELD CASE, PM1 NEW17 DA3-1428-000 000 C 1 SHIELD CASE, PM2 NEW17 DA3-1429-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, HOLDER NEW9 DA3-1435-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, ACCESS LED LIGHT NEW9 DA3-1436-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD NEW

9 DA3-1437-000 000 C 1 COVER, HINGE NEW9 DA3-1438-000 000 C 1 SHEET, BLINDFOLD MVX250i E NEW3 DA3-1439-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, LI BATT NEW9 DA3-1440-000 000 C 1 CASE, LITHIUM NEW9 DA3-1442-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, CARD COVER NEW

9 DA3-1443-000 000 C 1 BASE, TRIPOD NEW9 DA3-1445-000 000 C 1 HOOK, CARD COVER NEW3 DA3-1447-000 000 C 1 COVER, ACC SHOE MVX250i E NEW5 DA3-1456-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, LENS NEW5 DA3-1460-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MIC NEW

5 DA3-1461-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, MIC NEW5 DA3-1462-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, MIC NEW5 DA3-1463-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MIC NEW5 DA3-1465-000 000 C 1 CHARGE LED NEW5 DA3-1469-000 000 B 1 PLATE, MEGA PIXEL NEW

39

PARTS LIST



5 DA3-1470-000 000 B 1 PANEL, FRONT MVX250i E NEW7 DA3-1471-000 000 B 1 COVER, LEFT NEW7 DA3-1472-000 000 B 1 COVER, CASSETE NEW7 DA3-1477-000 000 C 1 SPRING, CASSETTE CLICK NEW7 DA3-1481-000 000 C 1 SPRING, CASSETTE HOOK NEW

7 DA3-1482-000 000 C 1 KNOB, CASSETTE OPEN NEW7 DA3-1483-000 000 C 1 LOCK, GRIP PIN NEW7 DA3-1484-000 000 C 1 HOOK, F GRIP NEW7 DA3-1485-000 000 B 1 COVER, REGULATION NEW7 DA3-1486-000 000 B 1 COVER, ZOOM TOP NEW

7 DA3-1487-000 000 C 1 SHEET, CASSETTE ARM NEW7 DA3-1488-000 000 B 1 TAPE, ZOOM TOP COVER NEW7 DA3-1489-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, SPEAKER NEW

13 DA3-1490-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GRIP BELT NEW13 DA3-1491-000 000 B 1 COVER, REAR NEW

13 DA3-1492-000 000 C 1 KNOB, BATTERY EJECT NEW13 DA3-1495-000 000 C 1 PLATE, STRAP NEW13 DA3-1497-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, EJECT NEW13 DA3-1498-000 000 C 1 SPRING, EJECT NEW13 DA3-1499-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, GRIP BELT NEW

13 DA3-1500-000 000 C 1 BELT, GRIP NEW11 DA3-1502-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM MVX250i E NEW11 DA3-1503-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LCD NEW11 DA3-1504-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HINGE TOP MVX250i E NEW11 DA3-1505-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HINGE BOTTOM NEW

11 DA3-1506-000 000 B 1 KNOB, LCD OPEN NEW11 DA3-1508-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP MVX250i E NEW11 DA3-1510-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW19 DA3-1511-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF TOP NEW19 DA3-1512-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF BOTTOM NEW

19 DA3-1516-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CVF LENS NEW19 DA3-1517-000 000 B 1 COVER, DUST NEW19 DA3-1518-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF CLICK NEW19 DA3-1520-000 000 C 1 KNOB, CVF NEW19 DA3-1521-000 000 C 1 REFLECTOR, CVF NEW

19 DA3-1522-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, CVF PANEL NEW19 DA3-1523-000 000 C 1 DIFFUSER, CVF NEW19 DA3-1524-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, FPC NEW5 DA3-1526-000 000 B 1 COVER, JACK2 MVX250i E NEW5 DA3-1531-000 000 B 1 PANEL, FRONT MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW

5 DA3-1532-000 000 B 1 COVER, JACK2 C MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW11 DA3-1534-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP MVX200 E NEW11 DA3-1544-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HINGE TOP MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW3 DA3-1548-000 000 C 1 COVER, ACC SHOE MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW

11 DA3-1552-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP MVX200i E NEW

5 DA3-1568-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, LED LAY CUT NEW11 DA3-1569-000 000 C 1 SPRING, LCD LOCK NEW9 DA3-1571-000 000 B 1 SHEET, BLINDFOLD BLUE MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW7 DA3-1574-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, LEFT COVER NEW5 DA3-1588-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, LED W LAY CUT MVX250i E NEW

17 DA3-1591-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, SHIELDING FOAM NEW7 DA3-1592-000 000 C 1 TAPE, ZOOM TOP COVER2 NEW7 DA3-1593-000 000 C 1 TAPE, GND NEW7 DA3-1595-000 000 C 1 LABEL, CAUTION MVX250i E NEW7 DA3-1596-000 000 C 1 LABEL, CAUTION MVX200 E NEW

7 DA3-1597-000 000 C 1 LABEL, CAUTION MVX200i E NEW7 DA3-1601-000 000 C 1 TAPE,LB GND NEW5 DA3-1602-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, FRONT NEW7 DA3-1603-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, L COVER NEW

15 DA3-1604-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, RC1 NEW

40

PARTS LIST



15 DA3-1605-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, RC2 NEW11 DA3-1607-000 000 C 4 SHEET, LCD2 NEW17 DA3-1609-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, CCD CORE NEW9 DA3-1610-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION NEW9 DA3-1611-000 000 C 1 LABEL, HOLD NEW

19 DA3-2318-000 000 C 1 MASK, CVF NEW35 DA3-2337-000 000 B 1 CAP, FRONT NEW35 DA3-2338-000 000 B 1 CAP, REAR NEW35 DA3-2340-000 000 B 1 CAP, FRONT NEW25 DA3-2345-000 000 C 1 COVER, HOUSING NEW

29 DF1-1686-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y29 DF1-1687-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE S29 DF1-1688-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE T27 DF1-1693-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASS’Y, TENSION27 DF1-1694-000 000 C 1 RELEASE ASS’Y, TENSION

27 DF1-1695-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASS’Y25 DF1-1703-000 000 C 1 IDLER ASS’Y27 DF1-1704-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASS’Y, S5 DF1-5058-000 000 C 1 MIC ASS’Y NEW

13 DF1-5059-000 000 C 1 TERMINAL ASS’Y, BATTERY NEW

7 DF1-5064-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, CASSETTE NEW17 DF1-5075-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, RECORDER NEW3 DF1-5078-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, TOP NEW

29 DG1-4497-010 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL ASS’Y29 DG1-4500-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, PINCH

31 DG1-4501-000 000 C 1 CHASSIS ASS’Y, MAIN29 DG1-4502-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASS’Y, LOADING29 DG1-4503-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASS’Y, CAPSTAN27 DG1-4504-000 000 C 1 REEL ASS’Y, S27 DG1-4505-000 000 C 1 REEL ASS’Y, T

25 DG1-4506-000 000 B 1 COMPARTMENT ASS’Y, CASSETTE17 DG3-0398-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CAV NEW21 DG3-0399-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CCD NEW11 DG3-0400-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LCD NEW5 DG3-0401-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, JACK1 MVX250i E NEW

17 DG3-0402-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, JACK2 NEW9 DG3-0403-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, KEY NEW

11 DG3-0404-000 000 C 1 BACK LIGHT ASS’Y, LCD NEW19 DG3-0405-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CVF NEW11 DG3-0406-000 000 C 1 HINGE, LCD NEW

19 DG3-0407-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASS’Y, CVF NEW7 DG3-0408-000 000 B 1 ZOOM PHOTO ASS’Y MVX250i E NEW

13 DG3-0409-000 000 B 1 SWITCH ASS’Y,POWER NEW15 DG3-0410-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR ASS’Y, SHOE MVX250i E NEW5 DG3-0418-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, JACK1 MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW

11 DG3-0419-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD DETECT NEW7 DG3-0432-000 000 B 1 ZOOM PHOTO ASS’Y MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW

23 DG3-0715-000 000 C 1 LENS ASS’Y NEW17 DH2-5172-000 000 C 1 FPC, MAIN-KEY NEW17 DH2-5173-000 000 C 1 FPC, MAIN-JACK1 NEW

17 DH2-5174-000 000 C 1 FPC, MAIN-JACK2 NEW15 DH2-5175-000 000 C 1 FPC, ACS-MAIN MVX250i E NEW21 DH2-5176-000 000 C 1 FPC, CCD-CAV NEW19 DH2-5203-000 000 C 1 FPC, CVF-CAV NEW17 DH2-5204-000 000 C 1 FPC, CAV-JACK1 NEW

11 DH2-5205-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD-KEY NEW7 DH2-5206-000 000 C 1 FPC, SPEAKER NEW

17 DH2-5209-000 000 C 1 CABLE, MAIN-JACK1 NEW21 DH9-3009-000 000 B 1 FILTER, IR NEW29 DS1-0192-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (PINCH)

41

PARTS LIST



27 DS1-0193-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (TENSION)27 DS1-0198-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (T BRAKE)27 DS1-0199-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (S BRAKE)25 DY1-8500-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y NEW25 DY1-8501-000 000 B 1 CHASSIS ASS’Y, SLIDE

33 DY1-8528-000 000 C 1 COVER, BATTERY33 DY1-8530-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLER(E)

MVX250i E, MVX200i E33 DY1-8531-000 000 C 1 DC CABLE17 DY1-8609-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT, DMCIII

17 DY1-8645-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN MVX250i E NEW17 DY1-8648-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN MVX200i E NEW17 DY1-8649-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN MVX200 E NEW5 DY1-8650-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, JACK1 MVX250i E NEW5 DY1-8651-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, JACK2 NEW

9 DY1-8656-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, RIGHT MVX250i E NEW9 DY1-8657-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, RIGHT MVX200i E NEW5 DY1-8658-000 000 B 1 RING ASS’Y, LENS MVX250i E NEW5 DY1-8660-000 000 B 1 RING ASS’Y, LENS MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW

*1 11 DY1-8670-000 000 B 1 LCD ASS’Y(SELECTION) NEW

21 DY1-8671-000 000 C 1 CCD ASS’Y NEW5 DY1-8673-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, JACK1 MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW

33 DY1-8674-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLER(PAL)MVX200 E NEW

19 DY1-8678-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, CVF INNER TOP NEW

9 DY1-8681-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, RIGHT MVX200 E NEW5 DY1-8682-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, FRONT MVX250i E NEW5 DY1-8683-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, FRONT MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW

19 DY1-8703-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, CVF INNER BOTTOM NEWVD7-2871-001 000 C 3 CHIP FUSE NEW

VD7-2871-501 000 C 2 CHIP FUSE NEWVS1-6596-027 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 27PVS1-7098-021 000 C 2 CONNECTOR 21P

17 WE8-6147-000 000 C 1 CORE, FERRITE NEW21 WE8-6201-000 000 C 1 CORE, FERRITE NEW

19 WG2-5241-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y, CVF*2 11 WG2-5272-000 000 B 1 LCD ASS’Y NEW

7 WR1-5090-000 000 C 1 SPEAKERWS1-5524-000 000 C 1 JACK, MINI AVWS1-5716-000 000 C 1 JACK, MIC MVX250i E

WS1-6113-000 000 C 1 JACK, DCWS1-6247-000 000 C 1 JACK, USB NEWWS1-6263-000 000 C 1 JACK, S-VIDEO NEWWS1-6347-000 000 C 1 JACK, DV NEW

3 XA1-3170-507 000 F 4 SCREW

25,29,31 XA1-7140-147 000 C 3 SCREW3,15,17 XA1-7170-207 000 F 4 SCREW

3,15,17,19 XA1-7170-257 000 F 16 SCREW3,7 XA1-7170-307 000 F 12 SCREW

3,5,7,15 XA1-7170-357 000 F 10 SCREW

11 XA1-7170-407 000 F 2 SCREW3 XA1-7170-507 000 F 1 SCREW3 XA1-7170-557 000 F 1 SCREW

23 XA4-5170-457 000 F 2 SCREW13,23 XA4-9170-357 000 F 3 SCREW

3,5,9,13,19 XA4-9170-407 000 F 8 SCREW13,23 XA4-9170-457 000 F 8 SCREW NEW

7 XA4-9170-459 000 F 5 SCREW NEW3,5,9,21 XA4-9170-507 000 F 14 SCREW

13 XA4-9170-557 000 F 1 SCREW

42

PARTS LIST



3 XA4-9170-607 000 F 1 SCREW11 XA4-9170-907 000 F 1 SCREW NEW19 XA9-1166-000 000 F 1 SCREW17 XA9-1167-000 000 F 3 SCREW23 YH8-2015-000 000 C 1 IG METER ASS’Y NEW

19 YN1-3090-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYEPIECE 1 NEW19 YN1-3093-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYEPIECE 2 NEW

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

CONTENTS

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

CAMERA SECTION-1

CAMERA SECTION-2

CAMERA SECTION-3

CAMERA SECTION-4

SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION

SERVO SECTION

AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1


POWER SUPPLY SECTION

LCD P.C.B. SECTION

JACK1,2 SECTION

( DIGITAL MECHANICAL CHASSIS II )DMC III

MAINCHASSIS

DRUMMOTOR

LOADINGMOTOR

SLIDECHASSIS

VIDEOHEAD

SD CARD

MIC UNIT

DV JACK

S JACK

HINGE UNIT

LENSUNIT

ZOOM MOTOR

FOCUS MOTOR

FOCUS SENS

ZOOM SENS

TEMP SENS

IG METER

Metal contact (Pins' face up)Metal contact (Pins' face down)

: :

BACK LIGHT

LCD

LCD UNIT

Metal contact Metal contact

CCD P.C.B.

BATTERY TERMINAL

OPERATION KEY UNIT

CVF P.C.B.

LCD P.C.B.

1

5

21P

21P

18P

18P

11P

11P 10P

7P

7P

10P

10P

IC3201

IC301

IC300

IC100

IC102

IC103

CN3201

CN3202

CN101CN1100

CN303CN302CN100CN2000

CN2102

CN2101

CN891

CN102 CN103CN2900

1

2

1

5

1

8A1

B1

1

2 20

211 181 10

1 7

1 2

21 20

2

26

1

25 1211

21

A1B1

A1

B1B15A15

A12

B12

CN300

CN301110

111

IC1810

IC1811IC3203

IC1101

IC1102

IC1103

IC2300

IC2301

IC2000

IC2302

MAIN P.C.B.

CN107018

2

19

1

IC1070

IC1002

CN1000218119

CN1501222123

CN1200

2829

21

CN7018

1

IC1004

IC1001

IC801

CN1001B60

A60

IC1501IC1200

B1

A1

CAV P.C.B.

7

1

8

2CN42

CN431

4

CN51

2

26

1

25

CN32111

2

MIC JACK

AV JACK

USB JACK

DC JACK

IC1601

IC1602

JACK1 P.C.B.

CN91 121220

CN31 CN11

JACK2 P.C.B.

2

1

22

23

CN4101

122 CN4102

1

23

2

24

CN902

1

4CN903

1 2

25 26

CN901

IC902

IC901

IC4201

CN10051

1

50

2

CN102

1 2

27 26

CN101

KEY P.C.B.

SPEAKER FPC UNIT

LCD

24P

12

5150

LCD DETECT FPC

51P

51P

27P

5P

26P

26P

4P

4P

24P

27P

2P

5P

8P

120P

120P19P

29P

8P

23P

23P 22P

22P

SHOE CONNECTOR

12P

19P

4P

ZOOM PHOTO KEY UNIT

10P

21P

21P

26P

12P

2P

26P

4P

8PCN41

CN81

CN3551

CN3212

B60A60

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM MVX250i E,MVX200i E,MVX200 E

CANON INC. 2004C01 Mar. 2004

CN100123456789

10CN101

12345678CN102

123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051

CN103A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8A9

A10A11A12A13A14A15B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9

B10B11B12B13B14B15

CN300123456789

1011

CN301123456789

10

SP2 +SP1 −GNDCK 3VZOOM ADPICT SWKEY LED0P5VHALF PHOTO SWPHOTO SW

NET PW SWVTR PW SWCAM PW SWSTART/STOP SWGNDTAPE/CARD SWGRN/P.AEN.C

GNDCARD DAT3CARD CMDGNDCARD SCKCARD VSS1GNDCARD DAT2CARD DATGNDCARD DAT1GNDGNDDVDD2.7VCARD DETCARD PAODVDD3VN.CKEY AD0KEY AD1KEY AD2KEY AD4LI 3VCARD ACCESS LED GNDPNL OP SWPNL B/T SWPANEL RPANEL GPANEL BGNDGNDC SYNCLCD2.7VLCD2.7VLCD5VLCD8.5VLCD CSLCD EEP CSLCD EEP SOUTLCD EEP SCKLCD EEP SIN1LCD ONLCD BL ONVTR UNREGVTR UNREGVTR UNREGMO GNDMO GNDMO GNDMO GND

MODE RESETEPMCECNVSSN.CDEBCLKGNDDEBUDGNDDEBDDGNDXDEBENGNDGNDE3V+LI3VGNDFLASH CLKFLASH RSTFLASH RXD1FLASH TXD1N.CDVDD3VCG CSEEP/CG CLKEEP/CG SODOT CLKOSD I0OSD I1VIC HDVIC VD

UUVVDFGDPGSENS COMSENS GARDCOIL COMWW

LOAD(+)LOAD(+)MSW VSSMSW VCCMSW SENSLOAD(−)LOAD(−)DEW +DEW −N.C

MAIN P.C.B.

CN302123456789

101112131415161718

CN303123456789

101112131415161718192021

CN891123456789

101112

UCOILUCOILWCOILWCOILVCOILVCOILC H −W −W +C H +U +U −V +V −CFG2CFG GNDCFG VCCCFG1

BOT EBOT CMIC GNDMIC3REC PRFMIC2MIC1TIN −TOUT −TIN +TOUT +C INCIN GNDLED ALED KSIN −SOUT −SIN +SOUT +EOT EEOT C

SHOE UNREGSHOE UNREGPOW GNDPOW GNDPOW GNDID-1ST VDHGLST STSPID-2ADV MIC GNDADV MIC LADV/EXT MIC R

MAIN P.C.B.


A10A11A12A13A14A15A16A17A18A19A20A21A22A23A24A25A26A27A28A29A30A31A32A33A34A35A36A37A38A39A40A41A42A43A44A45A46A47A48A49A50A51A52A53A54A55A56A57A58A59A60B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9

B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42B43B44B45B46B47B48B49B50B51B52B53B54B55B56B57B58B59B60

CN20001234567

ADV/EXT MIC RADV MIC GNDGNDRAWDATA[0]RAWDATA[1]RAWDATA[2]RAWDATA[3]GNDRAWDATA[4]RAWDATA[5]RAWDATA[6]RAWDATA[7]GNDRAWDATA[8]RAWDATA[9]RAWDATA[10]RAWDATA[11]GNDDSP CLKGNDXTGHDXTGVDVGATEF RES SWZ RES SWMO GNDMO GNDCAM3VCAM3VCCD15VCCD−7VGNDGNDGNDGNDAMCKWCKAIF SOAIF CSAIF SCLKXPDIREC MUTEA MUTEEXT DETHP MUTESOUNDHP ONSP +SP −SP GNDSP GNDAA4.7VAA4.7VAA2.7VAA2.7VAA GNDAA GNDV I/O/HP RAV L/HP LAV RADV MIC LADV MIC GNDPWM IRISPWM NDPWM FAPWM FBPWM ZAPWM ZBDA LOADCAM SCKCAM SOAFE CSF PSBZ PSBIRIS PSBIRIS CLND PSBDA CFGSUB CONTAFE RSTI ENCGNDND ENCLED RETTEMPP GYROY GYROI SWP GY OUTAVDD2.7VY GY OUTDVDD2.7VP5VP5VAUD2 IMACS1 ILRCKC SYNCEVF COMGNDGNDEVF REVF GEVF BGNDEVF 3V ONEVF 8.5V ONVF B EVFVF G EVFVF R EVFGNDEVF HDEVF SENEVF EEP CSLCD EEP SCKLCD EEP SIN1LCD EEP SOUTLCD8.5VLCD2.7VLCD2.7V

HA GNDH1AH1BHA GNDH2AH2BHA GND

MAIN P.C.B.

CN2101123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526

CN2102123456789

101112131415161718192021


A10A11A12B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9

B10B11B12

CN320112CN3202

12345

AV GNDAV L/HP LAV RAV GNDV I/O/HP RAV GNDAV DETCAM LEDAVDD2.7VY GY OUTGY GNDP GY OUTGNDGNDD +N.CD −GNDGNDVBUSP5VGNDDC J SWRMC INCHAGE LEDVTR UNREG

YC GNDC I/OYC GNDYC GNDYC GNDY I/OS DETYC GNDYC GNDEJECT SWDIAL CWDIAL CCWKEY AD3GNDGNDTPAXTPAXTPBTPBGNDN.C

V I/OGNDVTR POW SWN.CCAM POW SWFCH OTCKSWPGNDPBRFEVF REVF GEVF HDMODE RESETVTR ON IC3201VTR UNREGMIC2MIC3TRSTTMSTDITDOEVF COMEVF B

DC −DC +

BATT −BATT −BATT INFO ADBATT +BATT +

MAIN P.C.B.

CN901123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627

CN902123456789

101112131415161718192021222324

CN9031234

MO GNDMO GNDMO GNDVTR UNREGVTR UNREGVTR UNREGLCD BL ONLCD ONLCD EEP SIN1LCD EEP SCKLCD EEP SOUTLCD EEP CSLCD CSLCD8.5VLCD5VLCD2.7VLCD2.7VC SYNCGNDGNDGNDPANEL BPANEL GPANEL RGND SWPANEL BT SWPANEL BT SW

TESTRGTBLUEREDGREENPSIGHCK1HCK2WIDETESTREFHSTPCGXSTBYVSSGN.CVSSVDDDWNENVCKVSTCSCOM

PANEL BT SWGND SWLCD2.7VN.C

LCD P.C.B.

CN1070123456789

10111213141516171819

N.CVH(+15V)GNDH2GNDH1GNDRESETGNDVSUBV4V3V2V1SUB SWCAM3VVL(−7.5V)GNDCCD OUT

CCD P.C.B.

CN4101123456789

1011121314151617181920212223

CN4102123456789

10111213141516171819202122

P5VCOMCKV1CKV2STVXSTVXENBENBVBBDSDXDSGDSGBL2.7VBRGVDDCKH2CKH1STHXSTHVSSVSS

COMCKV1CKV2STVXSTVXENBENBCSVVBBDSDXDSGDSGBRGCSHVDDCKH2CKH1VSSSTHXSTH

CVF P.C.B.

CN4212345678CN43

1234CN51

123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526

CN321112

EXT LMIC GNDADV/EXT MIC REXT P DETINT MIC GNDINT MIC RINT MIC GNDINT MIC L

INT MIC GNDINT MIC RINT MIC GNDINT MIC L

VTR UNREGCHAGE LEDRMC INDC J SWGNDP5VVBUSGNDGNDD −N.CD +GNDGNDP GY OUTGY GNDY GY OUTAVDD2.7VCAM LEDAV DETAV GNDV I/O/HP RAV GNDAV RAV L/HP LAV GND

DC +DC −

JACK1 P.C.B.

CN91123456789

101112131415161718192021

GNDTPBXTPBXTPATPAGNDGNDKEY AD3DIAL CCWDIAL CWEJECT SWYC GNDYC GNDS DETY I/OYC GNDYC GNDYC GNDC I/OYC GNDN.C

JACK2 P.C.B.

CN1200123456789

1011121314151617181920212223242526272829

CN1501123456789

1011121314151617181920212223

ND DRIVE(−)ND DRIVE(+)ND HALL IN(+)ND HALL OUT(+)ND HALL IN(−)ND HALL OUT(−)GNDZOOM BZOOM−B ZOOM−AZOOM AFOCUS−AFOCUS AFOCUS BFOCUS−BTEMPTEMP 2.7VFOCUS VCCFOCUS LEDFOCUS SENSZOOM SENSZOOM VCCZOOM LEDIG DRIVE(−)IG DRIVE(+)IG HALL IN(+)IG HALL OUT(+)IG HALL IN(−)IG HALL OUT(−)

VSSXSTHSTHCKH1CKH2VDDGRBBL2.7VDSGXDSGDSDVBBENBXENBXSTVSTVCKV2CKV1COMP5VP5V

CAV P.C.B.


A10A11A12A13A14A15A16A17A18A19A20A21A22A23A24A25A26A27A28A29A30A31A32A33A34A35A36A37A38A39A40A41A42A43A44A45A46A47A48A49A50A51A52A53A54A55A56A57A58A59A60B1B2B3B4B5B6B7B8B9

B10B11B12B13B14B15B16B17B18B19B20B21B22B23B24B25B26B27B28B29B30B31B32B33B34B35B36B37B38B39B40B41B42B43B44B45B46B47B48B49B50B51B52B53B54B55B56B57B58B59B60

ADV/EXT MIC RADV MIC GNDGNDRAWDATA[0]RAWDATA[1]RAWDATA[2]RAWDATA[3]GNDRAWDATA[4]RAWDATA[5]RAWDATA[6]RAWDATA[7]GNDRAWDATA[8]RAWDATA[9]RAWDATA[10]RAWDATA[11]GNDDSP CLKGNDXTGHDXTGVDVGATEF RES SWZ RES SWMO GNDMO GNDCAM3VCAM3VCCD15VCCD−7VGNDGNDGNDA CLK GNDAMCKWCKAIF SOAIF CSAIF SCLKXPDIREC MUTEA MUTEEXT DETHP MUTESOUNDHP ONSP +SP −SP GNDSP GNDAA4.7VAA4.7VAA2.7VAA2.7VAA GNDAA GNDV I/O/HP RAV L/HP LAV RADV MIC LADV MIC GNDPWM IRISPWM NDPWM FAPWM FBPWM ZAPWM ZBDA LOADCAM SCKCAM SOAFE CSF PSBZ PSBIRIS PSBIRIS CLND PSBDA CFGSUB CONTAFE RSTI ENCGND ND ENCLED RETTEMPP GYROY GYROI SWP GY OUTAVDD2.7VY GY OUTDVDD2.7VP5VP5VAUD2 IMACS1 ILRCKC SYNCEVF COMGNDGNDEVF REVF GEVF BGNDEVF 3V ONEVF 8.5V ONVF B EVFVF G EVF VF R EVFGNDEVF HDEVF SENEVF EEP CSLCD EEP SCKLCD EEP SIN1LCD EEP SOUTLCD8.5VLCD2.7VLCD2.7V

CAV P.C.B.

CN70112345678CN1000

123456789

10111213141516171819

EXT LMIC GNDADV/EXT MIC REXT P DETINT MIC GNDINT MIC RINT MIC GNDINT MIC L N.CCCD OUTGNDVL(−7.5V)CAM3VSUB SWV1V2V3V4VSUBGNDRESETGNDH1GNDH2GNDVH(+15V)

CAV P.C.B.

CN100123456789

10111213

CN101123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051

CN102123456789

101112131415161718192021222324252627

MMC RSVMMC CMDMMC VSS1-1MMC VDDMMC SCKMMC VSS1-2MMC DATMMC DAT1MMC DAT2CARD PROGNDCARD DETM GND

MO GNDMO GNDMO GNDVTR UNREGVTR UNREGVTR UNREGLCD BL ONLCD ONLCD EEP SIN1LCD EEP SCKLCD EEP SOUTLCD EEP CSLCD CSLCD8.5VLCD5VLCD2.7VLCD2.7VC SYNCGNDGNDPANEL BPANEL GPANEL RPNL B/T SWPNL OP SWGNDCARD ACCESS LEDLI 3VKEY AD4KEY AD2KEY AD1KEY AD0N.CDVDD3VCARD PROCARD DETDVDD2.7VGNDGNDCARD DAT1GNDCARD DATCARD DAT2GNDCARD VSS1CARD SCKGNDCARD CMDCARD DAT3GNDGND

PNL B/T SWGNDPANEL RPANEL GPANEL BGNDGNDGNDC SYNCLCD3VLCD3V LCD5VLCD8.5VLCD CSLCD EEP CSLCD EEP SOUTLCD EEP SCKLCD EEP SIN1LCD ONLCD BL ONVTR UNREGVTR UNREGVTR UNREGMO GNDMO GNDMO GNDMO GND

KEY P.C.B.

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNALDIGITAL VIDEO SIGNALANALOG AUDIO SIGNALANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL

IC801AK4567

AUDIO INTERFACE

K5

H9

G10

E9

D10

G9

H1

G1

F1 H2

H1

RG

SUBCK

V1

V2

V3

V4

CCD IN

CLIJ2

IC1002AD9929BBCZ

TG/CDS/AGC/AD

/V-DRIVER

IC1004MM1612JM

2.8V REGULATOR

IC1001SN74LVC/GU04DCK3

INVERTER

D2HD

VD

DCLK2/FD

SYNC/VGATE

OUT CONT

SCK

SL

SDATA

D11

D1

C1

C9

D9

J10

K10

K9

A2

B2

A3

B3

A4

B5

B6

A6

B7

A7

A8

B8D0

4 V OUT 5V IN

3 1

42

404134471932

28

26

39

44

45

27

25

36

35

31

29

21

20

223 2413

12

7

6

5

4

3

14 16 17

12H2

11H1

10RG

13SUB

1V4

2V3

3V2

4V1

6RC

8VOUT

14VL

7VDD

IC1070ICX475AK-K

CCD

CAV P.C.B. (1/2)CCD P.C.B.

VSUB

RESET

XTGHD

SUB CONT

XTGVD

DSP CLK

VGATE

AFE RST

CAM SCK

AFE CS

CAM SO

RAWDATA (11)

RAWDATA (10)

RAWDATA (9)

RAWDATA (8)

RAWDATA (7)

RAWDATA (6)

RAWDATA (5)

RAWDATA (4)

RAWDATA (3)

RAWDATA (2)

RAWDATA (1)

RAWDATA(0)

CN701

EXT LADV/EXT MIC R

INT MIC RINT MIC L

CAM SCKCAM SO

1358

CN1000

CCD OUTVL(−7.5V)

CAM3VSUB SW

V1V2V3V4

VSUBRESET

H1H2

VH(+15V)

2456789

101113151719

LRCK

WCK

AUD2 I

MACS1 I

AIF SO

AIF

CS

AIF

SC

LK

RE

C M

UTE

XP

DI

AMCK

AUDIOI/F

CONTROLLER

CONTROLREGISTER

I/F

HPFFIL1FIL2EQ

FIL3

+2dbto

−2db

−24db+12db

0db

OFFSETCANCEL

HPF

MIXER&

DEM

OFFSETCANCEL

HPFADC

PRE AMP

PRE AMP

SPK AMPALC2

MIXDAC OPGA

ALC1

LINE OUT

HP AMP

OVFDETECT

MICPOWER

AA2.7V AA4.7VP5VAA4.7V

Q803

Q804

SP−

SP+

Q801

Q824Q802

Q821

MUTEDL

Q822,Q823

POWERON MUTE

Q823

Q806

Q807

Q805

Q825

AFE CSSUB CONTAFE RST

RAWDATA(0)RAWDATA(1)RAWDATA(2)RAWDATA(3)RAWDATA(4)RAWDATA(5)RAWDATA(6)RAWDATA(7)RAWDATA(8)RAWDATA(9)

RAWDATA(10)RAWDATA(11)

AV L/HP LAV R

ADV/EXT MIC RCA-3

EXT DETHP MUTE

AV-1V I /O/HP RADV MIC L

SOUNDAMCKWCK

AIF SOAIF CS

AIF SCLKXPDI

REC MUTESP+SP−

LRCKAUD2 IMACS/ICAM3VCAM3V

CCD15VCCD−7VAA4.7VAA4.7VAA2.7VAA2.7V

P5VP5V

DSP CLKXTGHDXTGVDVGATE

CN1001A19A21A22A23B12B19B20A4A5A6A7A9

A10A11A12A14A15A16A17A59A60A1

A43A44A45A47A58B1

A46A36A37A38A39A40A41A42A48A49B37B35B36A28A29A30A31A52A53A54A55B33B34

TOCAMERA SECTION-4MAIN P.C.B.CN1100

TOCAMERA SECTION-2CAV P.C.B.

TOSYSTEMCONTROLSECTIONMAIN P.C.B.CN1100

TOAUDIO-VIDEOSECTION-1MAIN P.C.B.CN1100

TOJACK 1,2SECTIONJACK1 P.C.B.CN42

CCD15VCAM3V

2.8V CAM3V

HP MUTE

HP ON

V I /O/HP R

A MUTE

ADV/EXT MIC R

EXT DET

ADV MIC L

X1001

CCD−7V

CCD15V

CCD−7VCAM3V

AA4.7V

AA2.7V

P5V

42

CN1070CAM 3V

H2H1

RESETVSUB

V4V3V2V1

SUB SWCCD OUTVL (−7.5)VH(+15V)

16468

10111213141519172

Q1074

Q1071Q1073

CAM 3V

CAMERA SECTION-1



CAMERA SECTION-2

C CANON INC. 200401 Mar. 2004


4CLK

3DI

31AELEV2

42

48

45

40

51

1

5LD

6428

27

29

62

60

30

EVF A2.7V

LCD 2.7V

LCD 8.5V

P5V

DVDD2.7V

AVDD2.7V

AVDD 2.7VDVDD 2.7V

CAM 3V

Q1200

PWM FAPWM FBPWM ZAPWM ZB

Z PSBF PSB

PMW IRISDA CFG

Y GY OUTP GY OUTDA LOADIRIS CL

IRIS PSBI SW

P GYROY GYRO

I ENCCAM SO

CAM SCKZ RES SW

TEMPF RES SWLED RETVF B EVFVF G EVFVF R EVF

ND ENCND PSBPWM ND

LCD EEP SCKLCD EEP SOUT

CN1001

TOLENS UNIT

XSTHSTH

CKH1CKH2

GRB

DSGXDSGENB

XENBXSTVSTV

CKV2CKV1COMDSDVDD

BL2.7VP5VP5V

CN15012345789

111215161718192021136

102223

B52B39B43B42B44B55B57B53B46B47B54B56B30B32B58B59B60

B23B17B4B5B6B7B8

B14B13B3

B18B29B31B9

B16B15B28B26B27B21B11B10A25B25A24B24B48B49B50B38

ND HALL OUT (− )ND HALL IN (− )

ND HALL OUT (+ )ND HALL IN (+ )ND DRIVE (+ )ND DRIVE (− )

FOCUS AFOCUS B

FOCUS −BFOCUS −AZOOM −BZOOM B

ZOOM −AZOOM A

IG DRIVE (+ )IG DRIVE (− )

IG HALL IN (+ )IG HALL OUT (+ )

IG HALL IN (− )IG HALL OUT (− )

FOCUS VCCZOOM SENS

TEMPFOCUS SENS

ZOOM LEDFOCUS LED

CN1200

654321

1314151298

1011252426272829182116202319 HALL2− IN

HALL2−OUT

HALL2+OUT

HALL2+ IN

OUT1B

OUT1

IG HALL IN (− )

IG HALL OUT (− )

46 VC2

IG HALL OUT (+ )

IG HALL IN (+ )

IG DRIVE (− )

IG DRIVE (+ )

25

19

61

8

21

32

VDD

VC1

VM1

VM2

VM3

VM4.5

GYRIN1

GYRIN2

GYRLEV2

GYRLEV1

GAIN1 2

EN1

IRIS CONT

Y GYRO

I ENC

CAM SO

CAM SCK

EVF HD

C SYNC

VF B EVF

VF G EVF

VF R EVF

LCD EEP SCK

LCD EEP SOUT

EVF SEN

Y GY OUT

DA LOAD

P GYRO

P GY OUT

I SW

IRIS PSB

IRIS CL

IC1501LV4141W

EVF DRIVER

55BIN

54GIN

53RIN

15HD

8

7DATA

12

11

57SYNC IN

1

6

20

43

19

17

18

40

50 DSDOUT

47 VCC 2

13 BLSW

39 VCCCOM

38 COMOUT

28 CKV1

27 CKV2

26 STV

25 XSTV

29 XENB

30 ENB

23 XDSG

24

45

49

DSG

BOUT

GOUT

ROUT

CKH 2

CKH 1

STH

XSTH

DSD

COM

CKV1

CKV2

STV

XSTV

XENB

ENB

XDSG

DSG

B

G

R

CKH2

CKH1

STH

XSTH

SCLK

HDIN

VDD 0

VDD 2

VDD 1

VCC 1

LOAD

IC1200BH9921KS2LENS DRIVE

14

18

16

15IN 4

2

12VDD

13

22

7

24

26

20

9

10

6

17

OUT 4

OUT 4B

OUT 5B

OUT 5

OUT 2B

OUT 3B

OUT 3

OUT 2

IG ZOOM A

IG ZOOM −A

IG ZOOM −B

IG ZOOM B

IG FOCUS −A

IG FOCUS −B

37

35

36

56

58

33

OUT 6B

OUT 6

HALL1+ IN

HALL1− IN

HALL1+OUT

HALL1−OUT

ND DRIVE (− )

ND DRIVE (+ )

ND HALL IN (+ )

ND HALL IN (− )

ND HALL OUT (+ )

ND HALL OUT (− )

IG FOCUS B

IG FOCUS A

EN 2

EN 3

EN 4 5

IN 5

IN 3

IN 2

PWM ZA

F PSB

Z PSB

PWM ZB

PWM FB

PWM FA63IN 1

PWM IRIS38AELEV 1

55

53DAC 3 OUT

EN 6

ND ENC

DA CFG

HD PSB54IN 6

PWM ND

AVDD 2.7V

BACKLIGHT

A8.5V

A8.5V

P5V

Q1510

Q1506

Q1508

Q1507

EVF HDEVF COM

EVF GEVF REVF B

EVF SENEVF 3V ON

EVF 8.5V ONEVF EEP CS

LCD EEP SIN 1AVDD 2.7VDVDD 2.7VLCD 8.5VLCD 2.7VLCD 2.7V

CSYNC

TOCAMERA SECTION-4MAIN P.C.B.CN1100

TOCAMERA SECTION-1CAV P.C.B.

TOAUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-4MAIN P.C.B.CN1100

TOSYSTEM CONTROL SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.CN1100

P5VBL2.7V

COMCKV1CKV2STV

XSTVXENBENBDSD

XDSGDSG

BRG

VDDCKH2CKH1STH

XSTH

CN4101Q4101

1132345678

1011121415161718192021

COMCKV1CKV2STV

XSTVXENBENBDSD

XDSGDSG

BRG

VDDCKH2CKH1STH

XSTH

CN41021234567

1011121314151718192122

60

CAM SOCAM SCK

CAV P.C.B.(2/2)

CVF P.C.B.

LCD(CVF)

USB SIGNAL

F25

G22

G23

G24

G25

H22

H24 J22

J23

MA

DD

R U

(11)

J25

MA

DD

R U

(13)

MA

DD

R U

(14)

F24

F23

E25

MA

DD

R U

(0)

MA

DD

R U

(1)

MA

DD

R U

(2)

MA

DD

R U

(3)

MA

DD

R U

(4)

MA

DD

R U

(5)

MA

DD

R U

(6)

MA

DD

R U

(7)

MA

DD

R U

(8)

MA

DD

R U

(9)

MA

DD

R U

(10)

M22

MD

QM

C(0

)

M23

MD

QM

U(1

)

E23

MD

QM

U(2

)

E24

MD

QM

U(3

)

K24

MC

KE

U

K25

MC

LK U

L24

XM

CS

U

L23

XM

CA

S U

L22

XM

CA

S U

L25

XM

WE

U

K23

V22EADDR M(0)

V23EADDR M(1)

V24EADDR M(2)

V25EADDR M(3)

W22EADDR M(4)

W23EADDR M(5)

W24EADDR M(6)

W25EADDR M(7)

Y23EADDR M(8)

Y24EADDR M(9)

Y25EADDR M(10)

AA22EADDR M(11)

AA23EADDR M(12)

AA24EADDR M(13)

AB25EADDR M(14)

AB22EADDR M(15)

AB23EADDR M(16)

AD23EDATA M(0)

AE23EDATA M(1)

AD22EDATA M(2)

AE22EDATA M(3)

AC21EDATA M(4)

AD21EDATA M(5)

AE21EDATA M(6)

W1MCCLK A

Y4MCDT A(3)

Y3MCDT A(2)

Y2MCDT A(1)

Y1MCDT A(0)

W2MCCMD A

AB16RDY

AC17XECS M

AB18XEWRL M

AB17XEWRU M

AC16XERD M

AC15DREQ (0)

AE17XDACK (0)

T2TRST

T3TMS

T1TCK

T4TDO

AE14

AD13DN USB

DP USB

AD1XRESET

J2STROBE TMG(1)

AB20EDATA M(7)

AC20EDATA M(8)

AD20EDATA M(9)

AB19EDATA M(10)

AC19EDATA M(11)

AD19EDATA M(12)

AE19EDATA M(13)

AD18EDATA M(14)

AE18EDATA M(15)

AB24EADDR M(17)

AC25EADDR M(18)

AC23EADDR M(19)

AC24EADDR M(20)

AC25EADDR M(21)

AD24EADDR M(22)

IC1103(1/2)MB87M1982BGL-GE1

DIGIC DV

27

A2

60

A3

61

A4

62

A5

63

A6

64

A7

65

A8

66

A9

24

A10

/AP

21

NC

2

22

BA

0

23

BA

1

2DQ0

4DQ1

5DQ2

7DQ3

8DQ4

10DQ5

11DQ6

13DQ7

74DQ8

76DQ9

77DQ10

79DQ11

80DQ12

82DQ13

83DQ14

85DQ15

31DQ16

33DQ17

34DQ18

36DQ19

37DQ20

39DQ21

40DQ22

42DQ23

45DQ24

47DQ25

48DQ26

50DQ27

51DQ28

53DQ29

54DQ30

56DQ31

C21 MDATA L(0)

B20 MDATA L(1)

C20

D20

MDATA L(2)

A19

MDATA L(3)

B19

MDATA L(4)

D19

MDATA L(5)

A18

MDATA L(6)

B18

MDATA L(7)

C18

MDATA L(8)

D18

MDATA L(9)

A17

MDATA L(10)

B17

MDATA L(11)

D17

MDATA L(12)

A16

MDATA L(13)

C16

MDATA L(14)

D8

MDATA L(15)

A7

MDATA L(16)

B7

MDATA L(17)

C7

MDATA L(18)

D7

MDATA L(19)

B6

MDATA L(20)

C6

MDATA L(21)

A5

MDATA L(22)

C5

MDATA L(23)

D5

MDATA L(24)

B4

MDATA L(25)

C4

MDATA L(26)

A3

MDATA L(27)

B3

MDATA L(28)

A2

MDATA L(29)

MDATA L(30)

D6

MDATA L(31)

2DQ0

4DQ1

5DQ2

7DQ3

8DQ4

10DQ5

11DQ6

13DQ7

74DQ8

76DQ9

77DQ10

79DQ11

80DQ12

82DQ13

83DQ14

85DQ15

31DQ16

33DQ17

34DQ18

36DQ19

37DQ20

39DQ21

40DQ22

42DQ23

45DQ24

47DQ25

48DQ26

50DQ27

51DQ28

53DQ29

54DQ30

56DQ31

U25 MDATA U(0)

U22 MDATA U(1)

T25

T24

MDATA U(2)

T22

MDATA U(3)

R25

MDATA U(4)

R24

MDATA U(5)

R23

MDATA U(6)

R22

MDATA U(7)

P25

MDATA U(8)

P24

MDATA U(9)

P23

MDATA U(10)

N25

MDATA U(11)

M24

MDATA U(12)

M25

MDATA U(13)

M24

MDATA U(14)

B25

MDATA U(15)

C25

MDATA U(16)

D25

MDATA U(17)

A24

MDATA U(18)

B24

MDATA U(19)

C24

MDATA U(20)

D24

MDATA U(21)

B23

MDATA U(22)

C23

MDATA U(23)

D23

MDATA U(24)

A22

MDATA U(25)

B22

MDATA U(26)

C22

MDATA U(27)

A21

MDATA U(28)

B21

MDATA U(29)

MDATA U(30)

A23

MDATA U(31)

26

A1

25

A0

16

DQ

M0

71

DQ

M1

28

DQ

M2

59

DQ

M3

67

CK

E

68

CLK

20

/CS

19

/RA

S

18

/CA

S

17

/WE

IC1102HY57V643220CTP-7

SDRAM

IC1101HY57V643220CTP-7

SDRAM

A9

C10

A10

D11

C11

B11

A11

D12

C11

MA

DD

R L

(11)

A12

MA

DD

R L

(13)

MA

DD

R L

(14)

B9

C9

D9

MA

DD

R L

(0)

MA

DD

R L

(1)

MA

DD

R L

(2)

MA

DD

R L

(3)

MA

DD

R L

(4)

MA

DD

R L

(5)

MA

DD

R L

(6)

MA

DD

R L

(7)

MA

DD

R L

(8)

MA

DD

R L

(9)

MA

DD

R L

(10)

C14

MD

QM

L(0

)

B14

MD

QM

L(1

)

C8

MD

QM

L(2

)

A8

MD

QM

L(3

)

B15

MC

KE

L

A15

MC

LK L

D15

XM

CS

L

A14

XM

CA

S L

A13

XM

CA

S L

C13

XM

WE

L

D13

27

A2

60

A3

61

A4

62

A5

63

A6

64

A7

65

A8

66

A9

24

A10

/AP

21

NC

2

22

BA

0

23

BA

1

26

A1

25

A0

16

DQ

M0

71

DQ

M1

28

DQ

M2

59

DQ

M3

67

CK

E

68

CLK

20

/CS

19

/RA

S

18/C

AS

17/W

E

EADDR(0) to (22)EDATA(0) to (15)

RDYXECS1XEWRLXEWRUXERD

XDREQXDACKTRSTTMSTCK

MACS TDOD+D−

USB FS ENMACS XRST

CARD SCKCARD DAT3CARD DAT2CARD DAT1CARD DATCARD CMD

CARD SCK

CARD DAT3

CARD DAT2

CARD DAT1

CARD DAT

CARD CMD

XECSI

XEWRL

XEWRU

XERD

XDREQ

XDACK

MACS TDO

USB FS EN

D+

D−

MACS XRST

Q3502

MA

DD

R L

0

XM

WE

L

XM

CA

S L

XM

RA

S L

XM

CS

L

MC

LK L

MC

KE

L

MD

QM

L(3

)

MD

QM

L(2

)

MD

QM

L(1

)

MD

QM

L(0

)

MA

DD

R L

1

MA

DD

R L

2

MA

DD

R L

3

MA

DD

R L

4

MA

DD

R L

5

MA

DD

R L

6

MA

DD

R L

7

MA

DD

R L

8

MA

DD

R L

9

MA

DD

R L

10

MA

DD

R L

11

MA

DD

R L

13

MA

DD

R L

14

MDATA L0

MDATA L1

MDATA L2

MDATA L3

MDATA L4

MDATA L5

MDATA L6

MDATA L7

MDATA L8

MDATA L9

MDATA L10

MDATA L11

MDATA L12

MDATA L13

MDATA L14

MDATA L15

MDATA L16

MDATA L17

MDATA L18

MDATA L19

MDATA L20

MDATA L21

MDATA L22

MDATA L23

MDATA L24

MDATA L25

MDATA L26

MDATA L27

MDATA L28

MDATA L29

MDATA L30

MDATA L31

MDATA U0

MDATA U1

MDATA U2

MDATA U3

MDATA U4

MDATA U5

MDATA U6

MDATA U7

MDATA U8

MDATA U9

MDATA U10

MDATA U11

MDATA U12

MDATA U13

MDATA U14

MDATA U15

MDATA U16

MDATA U17

MDATA U18

MDATA U19

MDATA U20

MDATA U21

MDATA U22

MDATA U23

MDATA U24

MDATA U25

MDATA U26

MDATA U27

MDATA U28

MDATA U29

MDATA U30

MDATA U31

TOAUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1MAIN P.C.B.

TOSYSTEM CONTROL SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.

ST STSP TOPOWER SUPPLY SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.

MA

DD

R L

0

XM

WE

L

XM

CA

S L

XM

RA

S L

XM

CS

L

MC

LK L

MC

KE

L

MD

QM

L(3

)

MD

QM

L(2

)

MD

QM

L(1

)

MD

QM

L(0

)

MA

DD

R L

1

MA

DD

R L

2

MA

DD

R L

3

MA

DD

R L

4

MA

DD

R L

5

MA

DD

R L

6

MA

DD

R L

7

MA

DD

R L

8

MA

DD

R L

9

MA

DD

R L

10

MA

DD

R L

11

MA

DD

R L

13

MA

DD

R L

14

MAIN P.C.B.(1/7)

CAMERA SECTION-3



DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNALDIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL

P23 CSYNC0

A15

VF R2

B14VF G2

C14VF B2

B15 VF G1

A15 VF B1

E14 VF R1

Y6 EADDR(24)/PIO

Y5 EADDR(23)/PIO

G2 PIP(3)

PIO(2)J6

F5

C3

D3

PWM (3)/PIO

PWM (2)/PIO

PWM (1)/PIO

PWM (0)/PIO

T3XFB IOW/PIO

P2CCLK/PIO

G1VCLK

M23

VF R2

H1

AD

ATA

(0)

J1A

DA

TA (

1)

J2A

DA

TA (

2)

J2A

DA

TA (

3)

K2

AD

ATA

(4)

K3

AD

ATA

(5)

K5

AD

ATA

(6)

K6

AD

ATA

(7)

L1 L5 L6 M1

M2

M3

M6

N1

BD

ATA

(0)

BD

ATA

(1)

BD

ATA

(2)

BD

ATA

(3)

BD

ATA

(4)

BD

ATA

(5)

BD

ATA

(6)

BD

ATA

(7)

V3XEINTO/PI

AA25LREQ/PIO

Y25WCK

V21LRCK

W21AUD1 I

Z25AUD1 OTOAUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2IC2301(4/4)

IC2301(2/4)MB87M4541BGL

VIC4

AB

10A

DA

TA (

0)

AE

9A

DA

TA (

1)

AD

9A

DA

TA (

2)

AC

9A

DA

TA (

3)

AB

9A

DA

TA (

4)

AE

8A

DA

TA (

5)

AD

8A

DA

TA (

6)

AC

8A

DA

TA (

7)

AE

13B

DA

TA (

0)

AE

12B

DA

TA (

1)

AD

12B

DA

TA (

2)

AC

12B

DA

TA (

3)

AD

11B

DA

TA (

4)

AC

11B

DA

TA (

5)

AB

11B

DA

TA (

6)

AD

10B

DA

TA (

7)

IC1103(2/2)MB87M1982BGL-CE1

DIGIC DV

E1

D4

RAWDATA (2)

E2 RAWDATA (1)

E3 RAWDATA (0)

D2

RAWDATA (3)

D1

RAWDATA (4)

C3

RAWDATA (5)

C2

RAWDATA (6)

C1

RAWDATA (7)

B2

RAWDATA (8)

B1

RAWDATA (9)

A1

RAWDATA (10)

F4

RAWDATA (11)

AE4

AUDI2

AE2

AUDO1

LPCLK

AE1 WCLK

AE16

AD16

XEINT(1)

XEINT(0)

AE15

AE10

VCLKAE11

TDIR2

XEWR USB

BDATACLK

G2

TGCLK

G4

TGHD

H3

TGVD

AD3

VGATE

AD2 AUDO2

AE3 AUDI1

C4

C7

SC

S(4

)/P

IO

Z23

D(7

)/P

IO

C8 SCS(8)/PIO

W23 AUD2 I /PIO

W24 SDLSEL/PIO

AC17 AIN3

AB16 AIN5

X15 AIN4

Y15 AIN6

Y13 SDR CKE/PIO

AB13 XSDR WE/PIO

E5 PWM(4)/PIO

W2 XECS(5)/PIO

AC16 AIN7

AA13 XSDR CAS/PIO

A4 SCS(1)/PIO

A8 AI(2)/PIO

B2 PWM(5)/PIO

E11

SO

(3)/

PIO

C11

SC

LK(3

)/P

IO

CN1100B52B39B42B43B44B30B32B58B59B60A52A53A54A55B33B34A28A29A30A31A4A5A6A7A9

A10A11A12A14A15A16A17A19A23A21A22B35B36B20B12B11B10B5B6B7B8

B14B13A25A24B50B48B49B38B9

B24B28B25B26B27B21B16B15B3

A43B23B17B4

A44B19A37B37

EVF HDEVF COM

EVF REVF GEVF B

AVDD2.7VDVDD2.7VLCD8.5VLCD2.7VLCD2.7VAA4.7VAA4.7VAA2.7VAA2.7V

P5VP5V

CAM 3VCAM 3V

CCD 15VCCD −7V

RAWDATA (0)RAWDATA (1)RAWDATA (2)RAWDATA (3)RAWDATA (4)RAWDATA (5)RAWDATA (6)RAWDATA (7)RAWDATA (8)RAWDATA (9)

RAWDATA (10)RAWDATA (11)

DSP CLKVGATEXTGHDXTGVDAUD2 I

MACS1 IAFE RSTAFE CSCAM SO

CAM SCKPWM FAPWM FBPWM ZAPWM ZB

Z PSBF PSB

Z RES SWF RES SWVF R EVFVF B EVFVF G EVF

CSYNCDA LOADLED RET

I SWTEMP

P GYROY GYRO

I ENCIRIS CL

IRIS PSBPWM IRISA MUTEND ENCND PSBPWM NDEXT DET

SUB CONTWCKLRCK

CN2900A11A12B12B11B1

EVF REVF GEVF B

EVF COMEVF HD

C SYNCVF R LCDVF G LCDVF B LCD

WCK

LRCLK

AUDI I

AUDI O

MACS1 I

AUD2 I

MACS XINTI

MACS XINTO

XEWR USB

CCLK

VIC TDO

VF G LCD

VF R LCD

VF B LCD

27M

CAM 3V

LCD2.7V

P5V

AA2.7V

AA4.7V

CCD 15V

LCD8.5VDVDD2.7VAVDD2.7V

CCD−7VTOCAMERA SECTION-1CAV P.C.B.CN1001

TOCAMERA SECTION-2CAV P.C.B.CN1001


MACS1 IAUD2 I

Q2401

Q2400

N.C

MAIN P.C.B.(2/7)

CAMERA SECTION-4



39EPM

44CE

7CNVSS

31FLASH CLK

32FLASH RTS

30FLASH RXD1

29FLASH TXD1

16RMC PULSE IN

71DC JDET

10MODE RESET

STOV CS

VTOS SCK

VTOS DATA

STOV DATA

66EJECT SWITCH

17VTOS EN

48VIC3 CS

35VIC3 CLOCK

34VIC3 TO SUBCOM DATA

33SUBCOM TO VIC3 DATA

1VTOS PC

24VTOS ACTIVE

67CASSETTE IN SWITCH

59MTOC MODE2

58MTOC MODE1

57MTOC MODE0

40NTSC XPAL

84CASSETTE MEMORY A/D0



26CASSETTE MEMORY ON

VTR UNREG

DVDD2.7VLCD8.5V

LCD5V

LCD2.5VLCDD3V

LI3V

LCD ONLCD ON

LCD EEP SIN1

LCD CS

KEY AD4

KEY AD2

KEY AD1

KEY AD0

PNL B/T SW

PNL OP SW

47

4LCD EEP SIN

5LCD EEP SCK

3LCD EEP SOUT


61PANEL EEP CSPANEL EEP CS

63LCD CS

82KEY AD4

93KEY AD2

92KEY AD1

65PANEL BOTTOM/TOP SWITCH

91KEY AD0

64PANEL OPEN SWITCH

50CHAGE LEDCHAGE LED

50CHAGE LED

43DIAL CCW SWITCH

42DIAL CW SWITCH

95KEY AD3

27CASSETTE MEMORY SDL

28CASSETTE MEMORY SDA

49XRESET

19 EVF SEN

55 EVF 3V ON

20 EVF 8.5V ON

75 PAE/GREEN SW

78 TAPE/CARD SW

70 START/STOP

77 CAM POWER SWITCH

76 VTR POWER SWITCH

51 NET POWER SW

68 PHOTO SWITCH

69 HARF PHOTO SWITCH

23 KEY LED0

54 PRINT SW

11

RE

SE

T

2LIDET12 VOUT

13 VIN

14 VRO

5 SW

7 VDC

25 LI3V DETECT

18 E3DET

72 CH DET

3VBAT

4CS

6SWOUT

IC100M30620MCN

MODE MI-COM.

IC102BD4207FVBACKUP

11 XOUT

13 XIN

8 XCIN

9 XCOUT

52 VTR ON

90 A/D I

89 A/D V

53 CAM ON

41 CHARGE

99 INIT CHARGE1

80 DC V DET

88 BATT INFO A/D

96 VREF

87 BATT A/D

97 AVCC

60 VCC2

14 VCC1

E3V LI3V

VTR UNREG

E3V

DVDD 2.7V

DVDD3VE3V+LI3V

EPMCE

CNVSSFLASH CLKFLASH RST

FLASH RXD1FLASH TXD1MODE RESET

DEBCLKDEBUDDEBDD

XDEBENCG CS

EEP/CG CLKEEP/CG SO

DOT CLKOSD I0OSD I1VIC HDVIC VD

VIC VDVIC HDOSD I1OSD I0

DOT CLKCG SO

CG CLKCGCS

XDEBENDEBDDDEBUD

DEBCLKMODE RESET

DC J DETRMC INXRESET

EJECT SWVTOS PCVTOS ENSTOV CS

VTOS SCKVTOS DATASTOV DATA

VTOS ACTIVESTOV MODE2STOV MODE1STOV MODE0NTSC XPAL

CAS INMIC 1MIC 2MIC 3

MIC ONZOOM KEY

VTR POW SWCAM POW SW

CARD DETCARD PRO

CARD ACCESS LED

KEY AD3DIAL-CW

DIAL-CCWCHAGE LED

C SYNCVF B LCDVF G LCDVF R LCD

CARD DAT1CARD DATCARD SCK

CARD DAT3CARD CMDCARD DAT2

CN103B7

A15A2A3A4B2B3B4B5A1A6A8

A10A12B8B9

B10B11B12B13B14B15

CARD ACCESS LEDCARD PROCARD DET

VTR UNREGVTR UNREGVTR UNREGDVDD2.7VLCD8.5VLCD5V

LCD2.7VLCD2.7VDVDD3V

LCD BL ONLCD ON

LCD EEP SIN1LCD EEP SCK

LCD EEP SOUTLCD EEP CS

LCD CSPNL B/T SWPNL OP SW

KEY AD4KEY AD2KEY AD1KEY AD0C SYNCPANEL BPANEL GPANEL R

LI 3VCARD DAT1CARD DAT

CARD DAT2CARD SCKCARD CMDCARD DAT3

CN102Q102

2416154746451437363534174443424140393827262221201933302928231198532

DVDD3VE3V+LI3V

D100

Q100

LI 3V

X10110MHz

X10032.768KHz

CAM ONCHARGE

INIT CHARGE1DC V DETVTR ON

A/D IA/D V

BATT INFO ADADV MIC L

ADV/EXT MIC R

E3V

VTR UNREG

E3V+LI3V

TOPOWER SUPPLY SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.

TOCAMERA SECTION-1CAV P.C.B.CN 1001

TOCAMERA SECTION-2CAV P.C.B.CN 1001

TOSPEAKERFPC UNIT

TOOPERATIONKEY UNIT

TOCAMERA SECTION-4MAIN P.C.B.





TOSERVO SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.

N.C

BT100

BT101LITHIUM

BATTERY

CARD DAT3CARD CMDCARD SCK

CARD DAT2CARD DAT

CARD DAT1DVDD2.7VCARD DETCARD PRO

DVDD3VKEY AD0KEY AD1KEY AD2KEY AD4

LI 3VCARD ACCESS LED

PNL OP SWPNL B/T SW

PANEL RPANEL GPANEL BC SYNCLCD2.7VLCD2.7VLCD5V

LCD8.5VLCD CS

LCD EEP CSLCD EEP SOUTLCD EEP SCKLCD EEP SIN1

LCD ONLCD BL ON

VTR UNREGVTR UNREGVTR UNREG

CN101494846434240373635343231302928272524232221181716151413121110987654

SW100DATA/SELF

SW101CARD MIX

SW102REW

SW110

AEB/RECPAUSE

SW109

SW103STOP

SW104PLAY

SW105FF

SW106DE ON/OFF

SW107DE SEL

SW108END SEARCH

CN1004125789

1012

MMC VDDMMC RSVMMC CMDMMC SCKMMC DAT

MMC DAT1MMC DAT2CARD PROCARD DET

CN1022019181716151495431

23222113111012

LCD BL ONLCD ON

LCD EEP SIN1LCD EEP SCK

LCD EEP SOUTLCD EEP CS

LCD CSC SYNCPANEL BPANEL GPANEL R

PNL B/T SWVTR UNREGVTR UNREGVTR UNREG

LCD8.5VLCD3VLCD3VLCD5V TO LCD P.C.B. SECTION

LCD P.C.B.CN901

ADV/EXT MIC RADV MIC L

SP −SP +


EVF SENEVF 3V ON

EVF 8.5V ONLCD EEP SIN1

CN1100A1B1

B54B55B53B46B47B56A49A48

SP1 −SP2 +CK 3V

P5VPICT SW

KAY LED0HALF PHOTO SW

PHOTO SWZOOM AD

CN1001248679

105

GPN/P AETAPE/CARD SW

START/STOP SWCAM PW SWVTR PW SWNET PW SW

CN101764321

DVDD2.7VP5V Q105

LED100

SD CARD

MAIN P.C.B.(3/7)

KEY P.C.B.

SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION



CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL

DRUM SERVO SIGNAL

IC301BD6636KV

MOTOR DRIVE

IC300NJM12904R

OPE AMP

PGFG

FG

FG

DRUMMOTOR

CAPSTANMOTOR

MODE SW

LOADINGMOTOR

DEW SENSOR

CASSETTE IN SW

TAKE UPREEL

FG SUPPLYREEL

MIC

SAFETYSW

CN300W 10

1134129657

WVVUU

COIL COMDPGDFG

SENS COM

CN303BOT E 1BOT C 2EOT E 20EOT C 21LED A 14LED K 15

REC PRF 5MIC3 4MIC2

DVDD 2.7V

6MIC1 7C IN 12T IN− 8T IN+ 10

T OUT− 9T OUT+ 11

S IN− 16S IN+ 18

S OUT− 17S OUT+ 19

DVDD 2.7V

DVDD 2.7V

DVDD 2.7V

P 5V

CN302C H− 7W− 8W+ 9

C H+ 10U+ 11U− 12V+ 13V− 14

CFG2 15CFG1 18

U COIL 1U COIL 2W COIL 3W COIL 4V COIL 5V COIL 6

CFG VCC 17

CN3016712

DEW+ 8MSW SENS 5MSW VCC 4MSW VSS 3

28 D.VM

29 D.VS

60 C.VM

15 C.FGSMT

16 D.PGSMT

21 D.FGSMT

30 D.EC

40 L.FRB

41 L.REF

57 D.PS

58 C.PS

59 C.FBR

62 C.EC

61 C.VS

37

35

34

33D.COM

D.U

D.V

D.W

3

1

2

7

6

5

20

19

18D.FGIN−

D.FGPGIN+

D.PGIN−

12C.HW−

11C.HW+

10C.HU+

9C.HU−

8C.HV+

7C.HV−

44L.REV

42L.FWD

46R.IN1+

47R.IN1−

49R.IN2+

50R.IN2−

2C.U

3C.V

5C.W

D VM

D VS

C VS

CFG

DPG

DFG

CAP VS CNTCFGDPGDFG

DERRLMO FRBLLMO FRBHLODE ONDRUM ONCAP ON

CAP FWDCERR

T REEL FGS REEL FG

DA CFGDEW

MSW ADTAPE TOPTAPE ENDTAPE LED

REC PROOFREEL LED CONT

DA TREELDA SREEL

CAS IN

48 ROUT1

51 ROUT2

D VMD VSC VMC VS

MIC1MIC2MIC3

Q304

Q306

Q301

Q300

Q305

27 UNREGVTR UNREG

22 VCCDVDD 2.7V

45 L.VMP 5V

14C.FGIN−

13C.FGIN+

LOAD (− )LOAD (− )

LOAD (+ )

LOAD (+ )

Q303

BOT DET

Q303

EOT DET

MIC ON

CAS IN

MIC2MIC3

DA CFG





TAPE TOPSENSOR

TAPE ENDSENSOR

DMC I I IMAIN P.C.B. (4/7)

SERVO SECTION



USB SIGNAL ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL

IC2301 (3/4)MB87M4541BGL

VIC4

E1 A0

C2

A2

B5

A5

C5

D5

B6

A6

C6

D6

E6

B2

C3

D4 A19

D3 NC3

F1 CE

G1 OE

A4 WE

B4 RESET

D1

C1

A1

B1

D2

IC2300MX29LV160ABXEI

FLASH

E2DO0

H2

E3

H3

H4

E4

H5

E5

F2

G2

F3

G3

F4

G5

F5

G6DO15

EDREQ/PIO

EDACK/PIO

SCS(9)/PIO

EXT RDY1/PI

XECS(1)/PIO

XEWRL

SI(3)/PIO

EDATA (0)

EDATA (15)

XE

CS

(0)

XE

RD

XE

WR

U

TRS

T

XR

ES

ET

D(4

)/P

IO

AA

7

AB11

AA11

X11

AC10

AB10

AA10

Y10

X10

AC9

AB9

AA9

Y9

X9

AC8

AB8

AA8

Y7

X7

AC

6

AB

6

AA

6

AC

5

AB

5

AA

5

AB

4

AA

4

AC

3

AB

3

AC

2

AC

1

AB

1

AB

2

AA

1

AA

2

AA

3

Z1 W5

Y3

EA

DD

R (

22)

T6

X1

X12

V5XECS(4)/PIOW1

SCS(5)/PIOA5

SCS(6)/PIOF9

CDATA(5)/PIOP5

CLAMP PWMB12

VRH2B19

ACC PWMA12

C INF17

Y INC18

COMP INB20

VRH1E18

AGC PWMC12

AIN13AC14

CDATA(6)/PIOR1

CDATA(4)/PIOP3

CDATE(7)/PIOR3

BYPASSE15

C FBA19

Y FBC16

COMP FBE16

C OB17

Y OA18

COMP OB18

UNT CLKI/PIOF7

D(5

)/P

IOX

21

TDIM24

W5

B7

E10

Y1

W6

AA

12

N20V2

AC

25D

(4)/

PIO

X23A1

X2

B11 F8

TMS

SO

UN

D

AB

15A

IN9

E1

PIO

(5)

AB

17A

IN1

Y16

SH

OE

ID

1

SH

OE

ID

2

SH

OE

ON

SI

VD

HG

L V

L

HP

MU

TE

XP

DI

RE

C M

UTE

AIF

SC

LK

AIF

CS

HP

ON

AIF

SO

LPS

/PIO

XE

CS

(2)/

PIO

SC

LK(2

)/P

IO

SC

S(3

)/P

IO

M25

TCK

N25

AM

CK

X24

SO

(2)/

PIO

B10

EA

DD

R (

0)

KEY AD3DIAL-CW

DIAL-CCWDC J DET

CHAGE LEDRMC IN

EJECT SWXRESET

MIC2MIC3

DA CFG

VTR ON IC3201SHOE ID1SHOE ID2SHOE ON

ST VDHGL VL

EADDR (0)

RDY

XECS1

XEWRL

XDREQ

XDACK

USB FS EN

MACS XRST

EADDR (6)

EADDR (7)

EADDR (8)

EADDR (9)

EADDR (10)

EADDR (11)

EADDR (12)

EADDR (13)

EADDR (14)

EADDR (15)

EADDR (16)

EADDR (17)

EADDR (18)

EADDR (19)

EADDR (20)

EADDR (1)

EADDR (2)

EADDR (3)

EADDR (4)

EADDR (5)


EDATA (0)

EDATA (1)

EDATA (2)

EDATA (3)

EDATA (4)

EDATA (5)

EDATA (6)

EDATA (7)

EDATA (8)

EDATA (9)

EDATA (10)

EDATA (11)

EDATA (12)

EDATA (13)

EDATA (14)

EDATA (15)

RDYXECS1XEWRLXDREQXDACK

USB FS ENMACS XRSTMACS TDO

TCKTMS

EDATA (0) to (15)EADDR (0) to (22)

XERDXEWRU

TRST

CN2101

TDITMSTCKTDOV I /OTRSTMIC2MIC3

VTR ON IC3201

CN2900B9B8A7

B10A1B7B5B6B3

VTR UNREGAVDD 2.7V

P5VD−D+

VBUSAV DET

CAM LEDV I /O/HP R

AV RAV L/HP LP GY OUTY GY OUT

RMC INCHARGE LED

DC J SW

269

2117152078532

1210242523


TOJACK1,2 SECTIONJACK1 P.C.B.CN51

CN2102

S DETY I /OC I /O

EJECT SWKEY AD3

DIAL-CCWDIAL-CW

762

10131211

CN1100

DA CFGP GY OUTY GY OUT

AV RAV L/HP LV I /O/HP R

SOUNDAIF CSAMCK

HP MUTEXPDI

REC MUTEAIF SCLK

AIF SOHP ON

B18B29B31A60A59A58A46A39A36A45A41A42A40A38A47


N.C





D−D+

TO CAMERA SECTION-3MAIN P.C.B.

Q3501

Q3503

Q2313

Q3504

Q2312

Q2310

Q2311

WIDE DET

LETTER CONT

WIDE CONT

LINE IN

Q2308

VTR UNREGAVDD2.7VP5V

AVDD2.7V

HA4.7V

Q2309

AVDD1.4V

75Ω

Q2305

75Ω

Q2306

75Ω

Q2307

FROMAUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2IC2301 (4/4)

MAIN P.C.B. (5/7)

ELURA70 AELURA65 AMVX250i EDM-FV M100ONLY




DRUM SERVO SIGNAL CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNALDIGITAL (VIDEO+AUDIO SIGNAL)DIGITAL DV SIGNAL

TOAUDIO-VIDEO SECTION–1IC2301 (3/4)

VIDEO SIGNAL

AUDIO SIGNALTOCAMERA SECTION–4IC2301 (2/4)

NC

1

39

38

37

19

18

17

16

15

PIO(9)

PIO(8)

SCS(3)/PIO

PIO(7)

BRQ/PIO

TCLK/PI

BGRNTX/PIO

PWM(5)/PIO

PWM(7)/PIO

PWM(6)/PIO

AIN14

AIN15

AIN10

AIN11

AIN12

RFGT/PI

RFGS/PI

PWMD

PWMC

CFG

DPG

DFG

CAPDIR/PIO

D(6)/PIO

EADDR(8)/PIO

20

21

35

22

34

33

32

31

30

29

26

25

24

23

53

51

50

48

47

45

44

42

13

11

10

8

7

5

4

2

VD

HD

OSD I(0)/PI

OSD I(1)/PI

DOTCLK/PIO

D(0)/PIO

D(1)/PIO

D(2)/PIO

CTL(1)/PIO

SYSCLK/PIO

AIN12

XESC(3)/PIO

XEINT2/PI

PIO(6)

SCS(0)/PIO

UAT CLKO/PIO

TX/PIO

RX/PIO

XDEBEN

DEBUD

DEBDD

DEBCLK

PIO(4)

SO(1)/PIO

SCLK(1)/PIO

SCLK(0)/PIO

SO(0)/PIO

3

49

43

27

14

9

IC2302EM668165TS-7G

SDRAM

IC2301(4/4)MB87M4541BGL

VIC4

K21

K20

J23

J20

AB19

AA18

AC20

AB20

N21

R25

N24

N23

P25

W20

AB25

AA24

Y21

AB24

AA16

X5

U6

H6

E7

A3

C6

B3

R6

R5

T2

T1

H5

F11

F12

A10

A9

X25

A14

U20

U21

V24

T21

K25

AA22

H25

H24

H26

H21

F21

F23

F24

F25

G20

G21

G25

H20

E19

F19

C20

E20

C21

A22

B22

C22

A23

B23

A24

A25

B24

B25

E24

E25

D24

D23

C23

C24

D25

E23

G3

D1

B5

E2

W3

E3

V6

B2

E6

A2

AA14

AB14

AA15

AC15

Y14

P21

R23

R24

R20

U25

R21

T24

P24

AA23

X8

U24

U23

C13

L24

V25

B13

F14

A13

F13

2

17

21

1

6

34

32

35

3029 13 232226258281211

42

43

45

46

36 385

MAIN P.C.B. (6/7)

SDRAM2.7V

VDDQ1

VDDQ4

VDDQ3

VDD3

VDD2

VDDQ2

VDD1

ADDR (13)

ADDR (12)

ADDR (11)

ADDR (10)

ADDR (9)

ADDR (8)

ADDR (7)

ADDR (6)

ADDR (5)

ADDR (4)

ADDR (3)

ADDR (2)

ADDR (1)

ADDR (0)

MDATA (14)

MDATA (15)

MDATA (13)

MDATA (12)

MDATA (11)

MDATA (10)

MDATA (9)

MDATA (8)

MDATA (7)

MDATA (6)

MDATA (5)

MDATA (4)

MDATA (3)

MDATA (2)

MDATA (1)

MDATA (0)

UDQM

CLK

CKE

/CS

/RAS

/CAS

/WE

LDQM

DQMU

MCLK

CKE

XCS

XRAS

XCAS

XWE

DQML

BA0

BA1

A11

A10/AP

A9

A8

A7

A6

A5

A4

A3

A2

A1

A0

DQ15

DQ14

DQ13

DQ12

DQ11

DQ10

DQ9

DQ8

DQ7

DQ6

DQ5

DQ4

DQ3

DQ2

DQ1

DQ0

DQMU

MCLK

CKE

XCS

XRAS

XCAS

XWE

DQML

ADDR (13)

ADDR (12)

ADDR (11)

ADDR (10)

ADDR (9)

ADDR (8)

ADDR (7)

ADDR (6)

ADDR (5)

ADDR (4)

ADDR (3)

ADDR (2)

ADDR (1)

ADDR (0)

MDATA (15)

MDATA (14)

MDATA (13)

MDATA (12)

MDATA (11)

MDATA (10)

MDATA (9)

MDATA (8)

MDATA (7)

MDATA (6)

MDATA (5)

MDATA (4)

MDATA (3)

MDATA (2)

MDATA (1)

MDATA (0)

XTPB

TPB

XTPA

TPA

H1B2

CN2000H1A

3

H2A 5H2B 6

CH-1HEAD

DRUMUNIT

CH-2HEAD

CN2102TOJACK 1,2 SECTIONJACK2 P.C.B.CN91


GD

H C

ON

T

EQ

CO

NT

GD

L C

ON

T

RA

GC

RA

PC

EQ

FC

RC

LK

XR

CLK

RA

FC

UTI

L S

WP

(0)

UTI

L S

WP

(2)

UTI

L S

WP

(1)

RA

GC

RA

PC

UTI

L S

WP

(3)

RC

LK

XR

CLK

UTI

L S

WP

(4)

UTIL SWP(5)

REC H

SWP

PBRF

CTL(0)/PIO

XRDAT

PB H

RDAT H1A

H1B

H2A

H2B

XR

CLK

RC

LK

RA

FC

RA

PC

RA

GC

EQ

FC

EQ

CO

NT

GD

L C

ON

T

GD

H C

ON

T

Q2000

XTPBTPB

XTPATPA

VIC VDVIC HDOSD I0OSD I1

DOT CLKSTOV MODE0STOV MODE1STOV MODE2

CG CSSTOV CS

ZOOM KEYCARD DETCARD PRO

CARD ACCESS LEDVTOS EN

VTOS SCKVTOS DATASTOV DATA

XDEBENDEBUDDEBDD

DEBCLKNTSC XPAL

CG SOCG CLK

VTOS ACTIVEVTOS PC

VTR POW SWMODE RESETCAM POW SW

FCH 0

18191716

VIC VD

VIC HD

OSD I0

OSD I1

DOT CLK

STOV MODE0

STOV MODE1

STOV MODE2

CG CS

STOV CS

ZOOM KEY

CARD DET

CARD PRO

CARD ACCESS LED

VTOS EN

VTOS SCK

VTOS DATA

STOV DATA

XDEBEN

DEBUD

DEBDD

DEBCLK

NTSC XPAL

CG SO

CG CLK

VTOS ACTIVE

VTOS PC

VTR POW SWMODE RESETCAM POW SW

FCH 0SWPPBRF

A3B2A5A6A8

A10

CN2900

CAP VS CNTLMO FRBLLMO FRBHLOAD ONCAP ON

DRUM ONREC PROOF

REEL LED CONTDA CFG

DA SREELDA TREELTAPE TOPTAPE ENDMSW AD

DEWCAS IN

T REEL FGS REEL FG

DERRCERRCFGDPGDFG

CAP FWDTAPE LED

LMO FRBH

LMO FRBL

LOAD ON

CAP ON

DRUM ON

REC PROOF

REEL LED CONT

DA CFG

DA SREEL

DA TREEL

TAPE TOP

TAPE END

MSW AD

DEW

CAS IN

T REEL FG

S REEL FG

DERR

CERR

CFG

DPG

DFG

CAP FWD

TAPE LED

CAP VS CNT


HA 4.7VHA 3.3V

REC CONT RECON

EPH

PB ON

IC2000LD502W

VRP2

EQ VCO

GCA

GDL



MVX250i E,MVX200i E,MVX200 E

CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL

DRUM SERVO SIGNAL

27

3446

50

43

53

40

56

5

64

11

62

37

57

21

6022

15

6116

28

29

30

31

33

VCC

IC3201MB3881DC/DC

CONVERTER5 V IN 4V OUT

IC3203TK11147CS

4.7V REGULATOR

MAIN P.C.B.(7/7)

FU3201

FU3205

FU3202

FU3203FU1810

OSC

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

2

1 3

45

Q32041.4V (CH1)

2

1 3

45

Q32032.7V (CH2)

2

1 3

45

Q32053V (CH3)

CH8

CH7

2

1 3

45

Q3206P5V (CH4)

CH5

2

1 3

45

Q3207DRUM VS (CH5)

CH6

2

1 3

45

Q3208CAP VS (CH6)

DVDD 1.4V

AVDD 1.4V

MACS 1.4V

VTR UNREG

DVDD 3V

HA 4.7V

AA 4.7V

LCD 5V

P 5V

CCD 15V

CCD −7V

CAM 3V

HA 3V

SDRAM 2.7V

AVDD 2.7V

DIF 2.7V

DVDD 2.7V

LCD 2.7V

M SDRAM 2.7V

AA 2.7V

ON/OFFCONT.

CH1,3,4,8

CH2

CH5,6

CH7

D VMC VM

C VSD VS

TO SERVO SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.

ADV/EXT MIC RADV MIC LST STSP

SHOE ID1ST VDHGL VL

SHOE ID2SHOE ON TO

AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1MAIN P.C.B.

TO CAMERA SECTION-3MAIN P.C.B.

TO SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION-3MAIN P.C.B.

TOSEEVO SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.

4

3

2

1

5

6

7

8

T3202

D3203

Q3202

D3205

LCD 8.5V

D3202

DC +DC −

DC V DETA/D IA/D V

BATT INFO ADCAM ONCHARGE

INIT CHARGE1VTR ON

CN3201

Q1814

Q1815

Q1812

Q1813

Q1801

Q3209

Q321021

BATT INFO ADBATT −BATT −BATT +BATT +

CN3202

VTR ON IC3201

31245



TOBATTERY TERMIANL

ADV/EXT MIC RADV MIC L

ID-2ST STSP

ST VDHGLID-1

SHOE UNREGSHOE UNREG

CN8911211987621

TOSHOE CONNECTOR


Q3201

14

12 13 7

2 3

8

15

VCC

DSC POWERSAVE

OUTPUTDRIVE

2

4

3 1

LPF

LPF

LPF

LPF

LPF

LPF

LPF

IC1810MB3833A-E1

CHARGEIC

IC1811MM3012XNOPE AMP


POWER SUPPLY SECTION

C CANON INC. 200401 Mar. 2004


DATA COMMUNICATION

TOSYSTEM CONTROL SECTIONKEY P.C.B.CN102

TOLCD DETECT FPC

LCSECSSO

SOCLK

VTR UNREG

LCD 2.7V

LCD 2.7V

LCD 8.5V

LCD 5V

1

8VCC2

3

4

E CS

CLK

SO

SO

LCD 2.7V

LCD 5V

LCD 2.7V

VCC5V

Q901

Q902

Q903

1ON

3

WP4201

WP4202

4

1

1 5 2

346

23 5

4

5

DI

DO

CONTROL

VTR UNREG

Q4201SWITCH

Q4204

VTR UNREG

VTR UNREG

Q4202DRIVER

Q4203

BACK LIGHT

R/R-Y

IC902CXM3009TQLCD DRIVE

6

26

47

46

42

38

37

3618 29

5

41

43

13

14

15

16

17

19

20

21

22

23

8

7

44

45

33

35

34

GREEN

CN902

BLUEVSTVCKEN

2

1124

7

623

89

12

13141920

2122

35

RED 4VDD 18

L CS

CLK

SO

SEN

G/Y

B/B-Y

SYNCIN

SCK

SDAT

VC

C2

VD

D2

VD

D1

VCC1-1

DA

OU

TB

L C

ON

TRO

L

PD

F

VCC1-2

VCK

24VST

EN

G OUT

R OUT

B OUT

DWN

XSTB

PCG

HST

WIDE

CHK2

CHK1

RGT

REF

COM-DC

PSIG OUT

DWNXSTBY

PCGHST

WIDEHCK2HCK1RGTREFCOMCS

PSIG

LCD UNIT

CS

SK

2

3

4

1

5

7

T4201

6

VCC 5V

CN901

CN903

VTR UNREGVTR UNREGVTR UNREG

LCD 8.5VLCD 5V

LCD 2.7VLCD 2.7VLCD ON

LCD BL ONPANEL RPANEL GPANEL BC SYNCLCD CS

LCD EEP CSLCD EEP SOUTLCD EEP SCKLCD EEP SIN1PANEL BT SWPANEL BT SW

456

1415161787

24232218131211109

2627

PANEL BT SWLCD2.7V

13

LCD 8.5V

Q904

IC901BR9010RFV-W

EEPROM

IC4201R1223N152H

DC/DCCONVERTER

CONTROL

LCD P.C.B.

LCD

LCD P.C.B. SECTION



USB SIGNAL ANALOG AUDIO SIGNALANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL

1 VO

2 VCC

Y C

G1 G2

2 OUT 1VCCIC1601

ENC-03MAP SENSOR GYRO

2 OUT 1VCCIC1602

ENC-03MBY SENSOR GYRO

REMOTE CONTROLER

CN42

LED61

LED62

EXT LADV/EXT MIC R

EXT P DETINT MIC RINT MIC L

INT MIC RINT MIC L

13468

CN43

24

CN81

CN3212

AV JACK

DC JACK

CN41

MIC JACK

VBUS (+5V)D−D+

CN3551123

RU71


USB JACK

P5VP5V

VTR UNREG

CN91

TPBXTPBXTPATPA

KEY AD3DIAL CCWDIAL CW

EJECT SWS DETY I /OC I /O

234589

1011141519

DV JACK

S JACK

XTPBTPB

XTPATPA

CN111234

CN31

AVDD2.7V

AVDD2.7V


TOMIC UNIT

DC+DC−

CN3211

12

TOPOWER SUPPLY SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.CN3201

CN51

CHAGE LEDRMC IN

DC J SWVBUS

D−D+

P GY OUTY GY OUTCAM LEDAV DET

V I /O/HP RAV R

AV L/HP L

2347

101215171920222425



SW23

SW22

SW21

PUSH

MENU

EJECT ON

JACK1 P.C.B.



JACK1,2 SECTION



Canon Mvx250i Mvx200i e Sm

Documents

Transcript of Canon Mvx250i Mvx200i e Sm